Toyota 2008 Highlander Owner's Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

2

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6

Vehicle specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

7

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

1

Before driving

1-1. Key information .................. 30

Keys ..................................... 30

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors ............. 32

Smart key system................. 32

Wireless remote control ....... 53

Side doors ............................ 64

Back door ............................. 68

Glass hatch .......................... 73

1-6. Theft deterrent system ............................. 110

Engine immobilizer system .............................. 110

Alarm .................................. 116

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.)............................. 119

1-7. Safety information ............ 120

Correct driving posture ....... 120

SRS airbags ....................... 122

Front passenger occupant classification system......... 134

Child restraint systems ....... 140

Installing child restraints ..... 144

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ................. 75

Front seats ........................... 75

Rear seats ............................ 78

Head restraints ..................... 87

Seat belts ............................. 90

Steering wheel ..................... 96

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror.................................. 97

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 99

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ....................... 101

Power windows .................. 101

Moon roof ........................... 103

1-5. Refueling ........................... 106

Opening the fuel tank cap ................................... 106

2

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures........... 156

Driving the vehicle .............. 156

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with smart key system) ............................. 164


(vehicles without smart key system) ...................... 168

Automatic Transmission ..... 171

Turn signal lever ................. 175

Parking brake ..................... 176

2-2. Instrument cluster ............ 177

Gauges and meters ............ 177

Indicators and warning lights ................................. 179

Multi-information display ..... 183

2

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers .............................. 192

Headlight switch.................. 192

Fog light switch ................... 196

Windshield wipers and washer .............................. 197

Rear window wiper and washer .............................. 199

2-4. Using other driving systems ........................... 200

Cruise control...................... 200

Rear view monitor system

(vehicles with multi-information display) ............................. 203

Downhill Assist Control system

(4WD models only) ........... 207

Driving assist systems ........ 209

2-5. Driving information........... 214

Off-road precautions ........... 214

Cargo and luggage ............. 219

Vehicle load limits ............... 223

Winter driving tips ............... 224

Trailer towing ...................... 228

Dinghy towing ..................... 238

3


3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger .................. 242

Front manual air conditioning system.......... 242

Front automatic air conditioning system.......... 248

Rear manual air conditioning system.......... 256

Rear automatic air conditioning system.......... 259

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ......................... 262

Windshield wiper de-icer .............................. 264

Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ........................... 265

1

2

3

4

5

3-2. Using the audio system............................. 266

Audio system...................... 266

Using the radio ................... 269

Using the CD player ........... 275

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs ....................... 282

Optimal use of the audio system.............................. 289

Using the AUX adapter....... 292

Using the steering wheel audio switches.................. 294

6

7

3


3-3. Using the rear audio system............................. 296

Rear seat entertainment system features................ 296

Using the DVD player

(DVD video)...................... 303


(video CD) ........................ 311


(audio CD/CD text)........... 313


(MP3 discs) ...................... 314

Using the video mode ........ 316

Changing the initial setting .............................. 318

3-6. Using the storage features ........................... 358

List of storage features ....... 358

• Glove box ......................... 359

• Console box ..................... 359

• Overhead console ............ 360

• Cup holders ...................... 362

• Bottle holders ................... 366

• Auxiliary boxes ................. 367

• Side table ......................... 369

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone)......... 325

Hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone) features ............................ 325

Using the hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone) ........... 329

Making a phone call ........... 336

Setting a cellular phone...... 340

Security and system setup ................................ 345

Using the phone book ........ 348

3-7. Other interior features...... 371

Sun visors........................... 371

Vanity mirror ....................... 372

Clock (vehicles without multi-information display) ............................. 373

Conversation mirror ............ 374

Power outlets ...................... 375

Seat heaters ....................... 378

Armrests ............................. 380

Floor mat ............................ 381

Luggage compartment features ............................ 382

Garage door opener ........... 388

Compass ............................ 393

4


3-5. Using the interior lights ... 355

Interior lights list ................. 355

• Personal/interior light main switch ...................... 356

• Personal/interior lights...... 356

• Interior light ...................... 357

4-1. Maintenance and care .................................. 398

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ........... 398

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ............ 401

4

4-2. Maintenance ...................... 404

Maintenance requirements..................... 404

General maintenance.......... 406

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................... 409

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 410

Do-it-yourself service precautions ....................... 410

Hood ................................... 414

Positioning a floor jack ........ 416

Engine compartment........... 419

Tires .................................... 434

Tire inflation pressure ......... 444

Wheels ................................ 448

Air conditioning filter............ 450

Key battery.......................... 453

Checking and replacing fuses ................................. 456

Light bulbs........................... 467

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ...................... 491

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... .......................... 491

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)............................. 501

If you have a flat tire ........... 502

If the engine will not start.... 514

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ................... 516

If you lose your keys/ wireless remote control transmitter ........................ 517

If the electronic key does not operate properly

(vehicles with smart key system) ...................... 518

If the battery is discharged........................ 520

If your vehicle overheats .... 524

If the vehicle becomes stuck................................. 527

1

2

3

4

5

5


6


6

5-1. Essential information ....... 480

If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................... 480

If you think something is wrong ............................ 487

Fuel pump shut off system .............................. 488

Event data recorder ............ 489

6-1. Specifications ................... 530

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 530

Fuel information.................. 543

Tire information .................. 546

6-2. Customization................... 558

Customizable features........ 558

7

5


6-3. Initialization ...................... 561

Items to initialize................. 561

7

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ................ 564

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)........................ 565

Index

Abbreviation list........................ 568

Alphabetical index .................... 570

What to do if... .......................... 581

6

7

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

Pictorial index

Exterior

Windshield wipers

P. 197

Moon roof

∗

P. 103

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 99

Headlights

P. 192

Hood

P. 414

Parking and side marker lights

P. 192

Front turn signal lights

P. 175

Fog lights

∗

P. 196

Rear window defogger

Glass hatch

∗

P. 262

P. 73

Side doors

P. 64

Back door

P. 68

Rear window wiper P. 199

Tires

● Rotation

●

Replacement

● Inflation pressure

●

Information

P. 434

P. 502

P. 538

P. 546

Fuel filler door

P. 106

License plate lights

P. 192

Tail and side marker lights

P. 192

Rear turn signal lights

P. 175

∗

: If equipped

9

Pictorial index

Interior

Seat belts

P. 90

Front seats

P. 75

Head restraints

Power window switches

Rear seats

P. 87

P. 101

P. 78

C

Console box P. 359

Bottle holders P. 366

SRS driver airbag

P. 122

SRS driver knee airbag

P. 122

10

Cup holders

P. 362

Armrests P. 380

SRS front passenger airbag

P. 122

Floor mat P. 381

SRS side airbags

P. 122

A

Shift lever

P. 171

Shift lock override button

P. 516

Cup holders

P. 362

Cup holders

Auxiliary box

P. 362

P. 367

“DAC” switch

*

P. 207

Power outlet

P. 375

“SNOW” switch

P. 172

*

: 4WD models

11

Pictorial index

Interior

B

Inside door lock button

P. 65

Window lock switch

P. 101

12

Power window switches

P. 101

Door lock switch

P. 65

C

Vanity mirrors

P. 372

Sun visors

P. 371

Garage door opener switches

∗

Moon roof switches

∗

P. 103

P. 388

Personal/interior lights

P. 356

Rear seat entertainment system

∗

P. 296

Interior light

∗

P. 357

Personal/interior lights

∗

Interior light

P. 357

P. 356

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 122

Overhead console

Conversation mirror

P. 360

P. 374

Compass

∗

P. 393

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 97

∗

: If equipped

13

Pictorial index

Interior

D

Vehicles with a rear manual air conditioning system

Air conditioning system

P. 256

Cup holders

P. 362

Console box P. 359

Vehicles with a rear automatic air conditioning system


P. 259

Cup holders

P. 362

Console box P. 359

14

E

Auxiliary box

Side table

P. 367

P. 369

Cup holders

P. 362

15

Pictorial index

Instrument panel


(vehicles with smart key system)

P. 164

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 197

Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 199

Fog light switch

∗

Headlight switch

P. 196

P. 192

Turn signal lever

P. 175

Gauges and meters

P. 177


∗

Multi-information display

∗

Clock

∗

P. 373

P. 203

P. 183

Power back door main switch

∗

P. 68

Glove box P. 359

16

Enhanced VSC/TRAC off switch

P. 210

Tire pressure warning reset switch

P. 434

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever P. 96

Parking brake pedal P. 176

Hood lock release lever

P. 414

Auxiliary box

P. 367

A

Windshield wiper de-icer switch

∗

P. 264

Instrument panel light control dial P. 178

Power back door switch

∗

P. 68

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 99

Power outlet main switch

∗

P. 375

∗

: If equipped

17

Pictorial index


B

Audio remote control switches

∗

P. 294

Climate remote control switches

∗

P. 265

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)

P. 168

“DISP” switch

∗

P. 183

18

Telephone switch

∗

,

*

P. 330

Cruise control switch

P. 200

Talk switch

∗

,

*

P. 330

C

Vehicles without navigation system

Audio system

P. 266

Security indicator

∗

P. 110, 116

Emergency flasher switch

Vehicles with navigation system

Rear view monitor/navigation system

*

Security indicator

P. 110, 116

Emergency flasher switch

∗

: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

19

Pictorial index


D

Vehicles with a front manual air conditioning system


P. 242

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch

∗

/rear window defogger switch

P. 262

Vehicles with a front automatic air conditioning system


P. 248

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch

∗

/rear window defogger switch

P. 262

20

E

Vehicles without seat heater

AUX adapter

P. 292

Power outlet

P. 375

Auxiliary box

P. 367

Vehicles with seat heater

AUX adapter

P. 292

Power outlet

P. 375

Seat heater knobs

P. 378

∗

: If equipped

21

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

A/V input adapter

∗

P. 316

Power outlet

P. 375

A

Power outlet

∗

P. 375

Luggage cover

∗

P. 384

22

Auxiliary box

P. 382

Cargo hooks

P. 382

Shopping bag hooks

P. 382

A

Power back door switch

∗

P. 68

Back door strap

P. 68

∗

: If equipped

23

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.

Modification with non-genuine Toyota products may affect performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

24

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

25

CAUTION

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

26

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.

Symbols used in illustrations

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation

(e.g. a lid opens).

27

28

Before driving

1

1-1. Key information................ 30

Keys ................................... 30

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors........... 32

Smart key system .............. 32

Wireless remote control ..... 53

Side doors.......................... 64

Back door........................... 68

Glass hatch ........................ 73

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ..................... 101

Power windows ................ 101

Moon roof......................... 103

1-5. Refueling......................... 106

Opening the fuel tank cap ................................. 106

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)............... 75

Front seats ......................... 75

Rear seats.......................... 78

Head restraints................... 87

Seat belts ........................... 90

Steering wheel ................... 96

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ............................... 97

Outside rear view mirrors... 99

1-6. Theft deterrent system .......................... 110

Engine immobilizer system ........................... 110

Alarm................................ 116

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.) .......................... 119

1-7. Safety information ......... 120

Correct driving posture..... 120

SRS airbags..................... 122

Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 134

Child restraint systems..... 140

Installing child restraints ........................ 144

29

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without smart key system (type A)

Master keys

Valet key

Key number plate

Vehicles without smart key system (type B)

Master keys

Valet key

Key number plate

Vehicles with smart key system

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system (

→

P. 32)

• Operating the wireless remote control function

(

→

P. 53)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

30

1-1. Key information

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)

Take out the mechanical key.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted, you will need the mechanical key.

(

→ P. 518)

1

■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. ( → P. 359)

Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use and leave the valet key only with the attendant.

Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (

→ P. 517)

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

● Do not disassemble the key.

31

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart key system (if equipped)

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the doors (

→

P. 33)

Starts the engine (

→

P. 164)

32

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocks the glass hatch

(

→ P. 35)

Locks and unlocks the doors (

→

P. 33)

1

Locking and unlocking the doors

Front door handle

Press the lock button to lock the doors.

33


Back door handle

Grip the handle to unlock the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the door is locked.

Press the button to lock the door.

Press the button to unlock the door.

The door cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the door is locked.

Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

34


Unlocking the glass hatch

Press and hold the button to unlock the glass hatch. The glass hatch will pop up.

The glass hatch can be unlocked only when the back door is closed.

Lock the glass hatch again when you leave the vehicle. The glass hatch will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

1

Antenna location and effective range

■

Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna outside the luggage compartment

35


■

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of either of the outside front door handles.

When starting the engine or changing “ENGINE

START STOP” switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

When opening the glass hatch and locking or unlocking the doors

This system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the back door handle.

36


■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →

P. 518)

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

● Near a TV tower, electronic power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices

● When the electronic key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity

● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key

• A wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computer

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

STEP 2

When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold

, , or

on the key.

for approximately 5 seconds while pushing

1

37


The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)


Unlocking doors Beep

Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's door.

Hold the front passenger’s door handle to unlock all doors

Hold either front door handle to unlock all doors

Exterior: Beeps three times

Interior: Pings once

Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

( →

P. 116)

■ Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.

●

When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more

● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more

The system will resume operation when...

●

The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock button.

● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. ( →

P. 53)

● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. ( →

P. 518)

38


■ Key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart key system or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( →

P. 454)

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.

(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.

(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover, floor or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

1

39


● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights and warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to reduce the chance of vehicle theft and accidents resulting from erroneous operation.

● When any warning lights come on:

Take appropriate measures according to which warning light comes on.

(

→ P. 491)

● When a warning message is shown on the multi-information display:

Take appropriate measures according to the warning message on the multi-information display. ( →

P. 501)

40


● When an alarm sounds:

Take appropriate measures according to the following table.

Alarm

Exterior alarm sounds once for

2 seconds

Exterior alarm sounds once for

10 seconds

Interior alarm sounds continuously

Interior alarm beeps repeatedly

Situation

Tried to lock the doors and the glass hatch using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment.

Tried to close the glass hatch with the electronic key inside and all doors were locked.

Tried to exit the vehicles with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch OFF.

Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open.

Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P.

Switched to ACC mode while the driver's door is open. (Opened the driver's door when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

ACC mode.)

Turned the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch OFF while the driver's door is open.

Correction procedure

Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors and the glass hatch again.

Retrieve the electronic key and close the glass hatch.

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and lock the doors again.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Shift the shift lever to

P.

Turn the “ENGINE


OFF and close the driver's door.

Close the driver's door.

1

41


Alarm

Interior and exterior alarms sound continuously.*

Interior alarm beeps once.*

Interior alarm beeps once and exterior alarm sounds 3 times.*

Situation

Tried to close the driver’s door after carrying the key outside the vehicle with the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch in the IG-ON or

ACC mode and without the shift lever being in P.

The electronic key has a low battery.

Tried to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or when the electronic key was not functioning normally.

Tried to close the driver’s door after carrying the key outside the vehicle without turning the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch OFF.

An occupant carried the electronic key outside the vehicle and closed the door when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch was in the IG-ON or ACC mode.


Shift the shift lever to

P, turn the “ENGINE


OFF and close the driver’s door again.

Replace the electronic key battery.

Start the engine with the electronic key present.

Turn the “ENGINE


OFF and close the driver’s door again.

Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

*

: A message will be shown on the multi-information display.

■

If the smart key system does not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (

→ P. 518)

●

Starting the engine. (

→

P. 518)

■

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→

P. 454

42


■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

It is possible to deactivate the smart key system etc.

(Customizable features →

P. 558)

■ Certification for the smart key system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

1

43


44


1

45


46


For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1

47


48


1

49


50


1

51


CAUTION

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from smart key system antennas. ( →

P. 35) The radio waves may

affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

52


Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.

Vehicles without smart key system (type A)

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Pushing and holding:

Opens and closes the power back door (if equipped)


Opens the glass hatch

The glass hatch can be opened only when the back door is closed.


Sounds alarm

Vehicles without smart key system (type B)

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors


Sounds alarm


Opens the glass hatch (if equipped)


1

53



Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors


Opens and closes the power back door (if equipped)


Sounds alarm

■

2-step unlocking function

When you push , the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

■ Operation signals

again

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:

Twice)

Back door: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.

54


■ Panic mode

Vehicles without smart key system

When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.


To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

■

Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■

Key battery depletion


The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the key is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.

(

→

P. 453)


→

P. 453

1

55


■ If the wireless remote control does not operate


Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. ( →

P. 64)


● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (

→ P. 518)

● Starting the engine. ( →

P. 164)

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.

(

→ P. 116)



The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.

● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device

● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity

● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer


→

P. 37


Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable features

→ P. 558)

56


■ Reversing the operation of the power back door

Pressing the wireless remote control switch again while the power back door is operating will cause the operation to reverse. However, the reverse operation cannot be performed for the first second after automatic operation starts, even if the wireless remote control switch is pressed again.

■ Certification for wireless remote control


NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:






● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio-TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:


1

57


58


1

59



NOTE:


60


1

61


62


1

63


Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

■

Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)

→

P. 32

■


→

P. 53

■

Key


Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again unlocks the other doors.


The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (

→

P. 518)

64

■

Door lock switch


Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

1

■ Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Pulling the door handle can open the front door even if the lock button is in the lock position.

65


Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

66

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Operation

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.

To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:

STEP 1 Close all the doors and set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to ON. (Perform the step 2 within

10 seconds.)

STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door lock switch (

or

) for approximately

5 seconds and then release.

The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.


Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Shift lever position Switch position

P

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.

1

■ When locking the doors using the key


The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.


The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in

ACC or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.


Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features

→ P. 558)

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock the doors.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle while driving.

● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

67


Back door

The back door can be opened using the back door opener. The back door can be locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control or entry function (vehicles with smart key system).

■

Back door opener

Push up

Raise

68

■

Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)

→

P. 33

■


→

P. 53

The power back door (if equipped) can be opened/closed using the power back door switch or wireless remote control.

■ Power back door switches (vehicles with power back door)

Instrument panel

Push and hold the switch to open/close.

Pressing the switch again while the power back door is operating will cause the operation to reverse.

However, the reverse operation cannot be performed for the first second after pressing the switch to operate the door.


Back door

Push the switch to close.

Pressing the switch again while the power back door is closing will cause it to open again.

However, the reverse operation cannot be performed for the first second after pressing the switch to close the door.

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.

The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.

■

Wireless remote control (vehicles with power back door)

→

P. 53

1

Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with power back door)

Turn the main switch in the glove box OFF to disable the power back door system.

ON

OFF

The back door cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or power back door switch.

69


■ Back door strap

Use the strap when closing.

■ If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be operated from the inside.

STEP 1 Remove the cover.

STEP 2 Turn the lever.

■ The power back door can be opened when

● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON, and the shift lever is in P.

● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is OFF or in

ACC.

The power back door can be opened even when the glass hatch is opened.

The glass hatch will not be closed when the power back door is being closed. Close the glass hatch manually.

70


■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.

■ If the power back door does not work

The back door must be initialized. To initialize, close the back door completely by hand.

■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down.



→ P. 558)

1

71


CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Falling to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

Keep the back door closed.

If the back door is open, the luggage will be thrown out and exhaust gases will enter the vehicle.

■ Operating the power back door

● Check to make sure that passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught or hit when the back door is being operated.

● Careful attention is needed so as not to get your fingers trapped as the back door automatically closes when it has not been fully closed.

● Do not allow children to operate the back door.

Closing the back door on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door is fully closed.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the back door components

● Do not apply any force, paint or let any other foreign matter on the damper.

● Do not apply excessive force when the back door closer is operating.

● Make sure there is nothing in the doorway before closing.

72


Glass hatch (if equipped)

The glass hatch can be opened using the glass hatch opener or wireless remote control.

■

Wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key system)

→

P. 53

■

Glass hatch opener

Press and hold the button to pop up the glass hatch.

Raise


Vehicles without smart key system: The glass hatch cannot be opened when the back door is locked. Unlock the back door to open the glass hatch.

(

→ P. 53)

Vehicles with smart key system: Make sure to carry the electronic key when opening the glass hatch. (

→

P. 32)

1

■ Opening and closing the glass hatch

● Make sure that the rear wiper is switched off.

● Do not rotate the rear wiper arm while the glass hatch is opening. (If the rear wiper arm is rotated, close the glass hatch as it is then switch on the wiper. The rear wiper arm will return to the correct position automatically after wiping.)

● Make sure that the back door is closed before closing the glass hatch.

73




→ P. 558)

CAUTION

■ Operating the glass hatch

● Do not open the glass hatch while the vehicle is moving.

● Do not open the glass hatch while the rear wiper is switched on. (If the rear wiper is switched on while the glass hatch is opening, the wiper motor drive disc is swinging at the door panel.)

● Do not insert any object on the wiper motor drive disc.

● Do not close the glass hatch while the rear wiper is switched on. The rear wiper arm must be restarted suddenly after closing the glass hatch.

If as above are not follow, it may be interfered with you then hurt you.


Keep the back door and glass hatch closed.

This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

74

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat

1

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Vertical height adjustment lever (driver’s side only)

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob (driver’s side only)

Pull up the lever until the lock is completely released.

75

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power seat

76

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

Vertical height adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

Driver’s seat leg support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Seat lumber support adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

Active head restraints

When the occupant’s back presses against the seatback during a rear-end collision, the head restraint moves slightly forward to help reduce the risk of whiplash on the seat occupant.


■ Active head restraints

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.

1

During rear-end collision

Inner structure

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

77


Rear seats

■

Second seats

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Pull up the lever until the lock is completely released.

78


■

Third seats (if equipped)

The third seats do not have a seat adjustment function.

1

Moving a second seat for third seat access (vehicles with third seat)

■

Getting in the vehicle (right side only)

Pull up the lever and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most position

79


■

Getting out of the vehicle (right side only)

Lift the lever on the side of the seatback and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most position

■

After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle

Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.

Folding down the second seat

■ Before folding down the second seat

STEP 1 Stow the rear center seat belt buckle.

STEP 2 Pass the outer seat belts through the seat belt hangers and secure the seat belt plates.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being damage.

Make sure that the seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them.

80


■

Folding down the second seat

From inside

Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.

1

From outside (if equipped)

Pull the lever.

L: Left side and center second seats

R:Right side second seat

■ After folding down the second seat

Slide the folded second seat to the rear-most position.

81


Folding down the third seat (vehicles with third seat)

■ Before folding down the third seat

STEP 1 Stow the third seat belt buckles.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being damage.

Make sure that the seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them.

Pull the strap to fold down the head restraints.

82


■

Folding down the third seat

Pull the strap on the third seatback fold-down lever toward you to fold down the seatback.

1

Removing the second center seat

■ Before removing the second center seat

STEP 1 Take out the side table from the console box.

STEP 2 Lower the second center seat head restraint to the lowest position. (

→

P. 87)

■

Removing the second center seat

STEP 1 Fold down the second center seatback while pulling the seatback lock release strap.

83


STEP 2 Pull the lock release lever to remove the second center seat.

STEP 3 Stow the second center seat in the console box.

STEP 4 Make sure that the seat is securely in place and close the console box door.

84


Installing the second center seat

■ Before installing the second center seat

STEP 1 Take out the second center seat from the console box.

1

STEP 2 Remove the side table, if used, from the second seat.

(

→ P. 369)

■ Installing the second center seat

STEP 1 Fully engage the front pins with the hooks, and swing the second center seat downward.

Push down on the second center seat to engage the rear pin locks.

STEP 2 Unfold the seatback and lock it.

Stow the side table in the console box.

85


CAUTION

■ When adjusting a rear seat or removing the second center seat

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the seat.

■ Before folding down a rear seat

Do not fold down a rear seat when there are passengers sitting in the rear seats or when there is luggage placed on the rear seats.

■ After adjusting a seat

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking it back and forth.

● Second center seat: Make sure the seat is locked in place by trying to shake the seatback and lift up the rear part of the seat cushion.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.


Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■ When folding down the second seats

Do not fold the seatback forward with the luggage cover hooks attached.

■ Removed second center seat

Avoid putting heavy loads on the seat. The metallic seat pins may be damaged, and you may be unable to correctly reinstall the seat.

86


Head restraints

■

Adjusting the head restraints

Front seats

Lock release button

Vertical adjustment

To raise: Pull the head restraints up.

To lower: Push the head restraints down while pressing the lock release button.

Angle adjustment (if equipped)

Second seats

Vertical adjustment

To raise: Pull the head restraints up.

To lower: Push the head restraints down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release buttons

When using the center seat, raise the head restraint from the stowed position.

■

When using the third seat head restraints (vehicles with third seats)

To use

To fold

1

87


■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (except second center seat and third seats)

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Removing the front and second seat outer head restraints

STEP 1 Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

STEP 2 Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot.

(The slot is located on the opposite side of the head restraint to the lock released button.)

STEP 3

While pushing in the screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.

■

Installing the front head restraints and second seat outer head restraints

STEP 1

STEP 2

Align the head restraint with the installation holes.

Push down the head restraint on the lowest position while pushing the lock release button.

88


CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1

89


Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■

Correct use of the seat belts

●

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

●

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

■

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

Release button

90


■

Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

Down

Up

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

1

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.

To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. ( →

P. 144)

91


■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( →

P. 90)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

■ When not using the rear seat belts

Second seat belts

Pass the outer seat belts through the seat belt hangers and secure the seat belt plates to prevent the shoulder belts from being damaged.

92


Third seat belts (vehicles with third seat)

Pass the outer seat belts through the seat belt hangers to prevent the shoulder belts from being damaged.

1

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (

→ P. 140)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat

belt, follow the instructions on P. 90 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of change.

93


CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Seat belt pretensioners

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be further extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

94


CAUTION

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

1

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

95


Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

Pull the lever up.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

96


Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions.

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Normal position

Anti-glare position

1

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns automatic mode ON/

OFF

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned ON.

The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned on.

97


■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

CAUTION


Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

98


Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ACC or ON.

STEP 1 Select a mirror to adjust.

Left

Right

1

STEP 2 Adjust the mirror.

Up

Right

Down

Left

Folding back the mirrors

Push backward to fold the mirrors.

99


■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (

→ P. 262)

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.

100

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.

Closing

One-touch closing (driver’s window only)

*

Opening

One-touch opening (driver’s window only)

*

*:

Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

1

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

101

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF (driver’s window only)

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned to

ACC or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

CAUTION

■ Closing the windows


Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)


● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

102

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof (if equipped)

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.

■

Opening and closing

Open

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully opened position.

Move the switch backward again to fully open.

Close

Move the switch forward to stop the moon roof partway.

■

Tilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

Push the switch in either direction to stop the moon roof partway.

1

103


■ The moon roof can be operated when


■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned to ACC or turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ If the moon roof cannot be closed

If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically, such as when the jam protection function activates accidentally due to a malfunction, pressing and holding the switch close the moon roof.

■ To reduce wind noise

Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Moon roof open reminder function (vehicles with multi-information display)

An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch

OFF.

104


CAUTION

■ Opening the moon roof


Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof


Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

■ Jam protection function


● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

1

105

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

■

Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch

OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

■

Opening the fuel tank cap

STEP 1 Open the fuel filler door.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

106

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.

After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction.

1

■ Fuel types

Use unleaded gasoline. (87 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)

■ Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)

107

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION

■ Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

108

1-5. Refueling

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

1

109

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system (if equipped)

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without smart key system: The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.

Vehicles with smart key system: The indicator light flashes after the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch has been turned

OFF to indicate that the system is operating.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

110

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

● For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.


FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY


FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:


1

111


112


● For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.


1

113


114


NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the key

Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1

115


Alarm (if equipped)

The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected.

■

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations.

●

A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control door lock function or entry function (vehicles with smart key system). The doors will lock again automatically.

●

The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked.

●

The locked glass hatch is opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control door lock function or entry function

(vehicles with smart key system).

●

The battery is reconnected.

116


■

Setting the alarm system


Close the doors and hood, and lock all doors using the wireless remote control door lock function or entry function

(vehicles with smart key system). The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.


The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

1

■

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control door lock function or the entry function (vehicles with smart key system).

117


■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.

● Nobody is in the vehicle.

● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■ Panic mode

→

P. 55

■ When the battery is disconnected

Be sure to cancel the alarm system.

If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.

■ When using the key to unlock the doors

Deactivate the alarm.

118


Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

1

119

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (

→

P. 75)

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (

→

P. 75)

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.

(

→

P. 96)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

→

P. 87)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(

→

P. 90)

120

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ While driving

● Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

1

121


SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

122

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.

Driver knee airbag

Can help provide driver protection.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

Curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.

Airbag system components


1

Curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Front passenger airbag

Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

Front airbag sensors

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Curtain shield airbag sensors

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Driver’s knee airbag

Airbag sensor assembly

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

123


The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG

ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. ( →

P. 492)

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The front windshield may crack.

124


■ Operating conditions (front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.

a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. ( →

P. 134)

■ Operating conditions (side airbags)

● The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.

● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (

→ P. 134)

■ Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags)

The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.

1

125


■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

126


■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

1

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.

● Collision from the front


● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front


● Pitching end over end

127


■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

128


CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.

(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

1

129


CAUTION


● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. ( →

P. 140)

130


CAUTION


● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

1

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

131


CAUTION


● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

● Vehicles without smart key system: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys or accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the

SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver's seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.

● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (

→ P. 123).

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

132


CAUTION


● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment.

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players.

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

1

133


Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.



134

SRS warning light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light


Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult*

1

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light



Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Devices

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

■ Child *

3

or child restraint system*

4

AIR BAG ON

Off

Flashing*

2

Activated


Devices


SRS warning light






AIR BAG

OFF*

5

Off

Flashing*

2

Deactivated

Activated

1

135


■

Unoccupied



SRS warning light


Not illuminated

Off

Devices



Deactivated


Activated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Deactivated

■

There is a malfunction in the system


Devices


SRS warning light






AIR BAG

OFF

On

Off

Deactivated

Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

136


*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.

(

→

P. 141)

*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (

→

P. 144)

1

137


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger's seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.

Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

138


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. ( →

P. 144)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1

139


Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

●

Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child.

●

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(

→

P. 144)

140


Types of child restraint

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Infant seat

1

Convertible seat

Booster seat

141


■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (

→ P. 90)

CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

142


CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.

Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

143


Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)

Second seat: Child restraint lower anchorages

Lower anchorages are provided for the rear outside seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.)

144


Second seat: Anchor brackets

(for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for the second seats.

1

145


Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

STEP 1 Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

146


STEP 4 While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

■

Forward facing

⎯

Convertible seat

STEP 1 Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

147


STEP 4

■

Booster seat

STEP 1

STEP 2

While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the booster seat.

Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(

→

P. 90)

148


Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

1

149


Installation with child restraint lower anchorages

STEP 1 Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position).

Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lock position. (

→

P. 78)

1st lock position

3rd lock position

Type A

STEP 2 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchorages.

The bars are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

150


Type B

STEP 2 Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

The bars are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1

Canada only

Child restraint systems with a top strap (second seat only)

STEP 1 Secure the child restraint using the seat belt or lower anchors, and adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

151


STEP 2 Front of vehicle

STEP 3

Outside seat: Open the anchor bracket cover. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Center seat: Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

Hook

Top strap

Anchor bracket

Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819.

152


CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode. (

→ P. 91)

● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.

● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seriously injured.

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

● If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat or second seats so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

1

153


CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in a collision.

● When using the lower anchorages for a child restraint system, ensure that the seat is moved to the rear-most position, with the seatback close to the child restraint system.

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages

When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

154

When driving

2

2-1. Driving procedures ........ 156

Driving the vehicle............ 156


(vehicles with smart key system).................... 164


(vehicles without smart key system).................... 168

Automatic Transmission... 171

Turn signal lever .............. 175

Parking brake................... 176

2-4. Using other driving systems ........................ 200

Cruise control................... 200


(vehicles with multi-information display) .......................... 203

Downhill Assist Control system

(4WD models only) ........ 207

Driving assist systems ..... 209

2-2. Instrument cluster.......... 177

Gauges and meters ......... 177

Indicators and warning lights .............................. 179

Multi-information display............................ 183

2-5. Driving information ........ 214

Off-road precautions ........ 214

Cargo and luggage .......... 219

Vehicle load limits ............ 223

Winter driving tips ............ 224

Trailer towing ................... 228

Dinghy towing .................. 238

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers ........................... 192

Headlight switch............... 192

Fog light switch ................ 196

Windshield wipers and washer ........................... 197

Rear window wiper and washer ........................... 199

155

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■

Starting the engine

→

P. 165, 168

■

Driving

STEP 1

STEP 2

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

Release the parking brake.

(

→

P. 171)

(

→

P. 176)

STEP 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■

Stopping

STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N.

(

→

P. 171)

■

Parking the vehicle

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

(

→

P. 176)

(

→

P. 171)

When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.

STEP 4 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF and stop the engine.

STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting on a steep uphill

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.


■

Driving in the rain

●

Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

●

Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

●

Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:

●

For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.

This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding-down.

■

Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

→ P. 532)

2

157


■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.


● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

158


CAUTION

● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident.

● Do not turn the engine off while driving.

The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( →

P. 171)

● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

2

159


CAUTION

● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

160


CAUTION

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine OFF.

Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking the vehicle

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

2

161


CAUTION

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (4WD models)

Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in sand or mud etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (

→ P. 506)

162


NOTICE


Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle, transfer (4WD models), differential (4WD models), etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (4WD models), bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

2

163


Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)

Modes can be switched by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch when carrying the electronic key on your person.

■

Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode

OFF*

Emergency flashers can be used.

ACC mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber.

ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber.

*: The engine cannot be switched to OFF unless the shift lever is in P.

164


■


The engine can be started in any mode by operating the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. If the indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.

STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

2

165


■ Steering lock release

Make sure that the steering wheel lock is released.

To release the steering wheel lock, gently turn the wheel left or right while pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

When the steering wheel lock does not release, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will flash green.

■ If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

→ P. 110)

■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Auto power OFF function

If the vehicle is left in ACC mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in

P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.

■ Key battery depletion

→

P. 39

■ When the electronic key battery is discharged

→

P. 454


→

P. 37

■ Note for the entry function

→

P. 39

166


CAUTION

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.

However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to an unexpected accident.

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACC or ON mode for long periods without the engine running.


● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

167


Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)

■


STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start the engine.

■

Engine switch

“LOCK” (OFF)

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed.

“ACC”

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“ON”

All electrical components can be used.

“START”

For starting the engine.

168


■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”

STEP 1

STEP 2


(

→ P. 171)

Push in the key and turn to the

“LOCK” position.

■ Steering lock release

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK” position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction.

■ If the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

→ P. 110)

■ Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in

“LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION


Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to the “ACC” position.

169

2


NOTICE


Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for a long period if the engine is not running.


● Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

170


Automatic Transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■

Shifting the shift lever

While the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

2

■ Shift position uses

Shift position

P

R

Function

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

N

D

S

Neutral

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving (

→ P. 172)

* 2

* 1

: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the “D” position for normal driving.

* 2

: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

171


■

Selecting the snow mode

Use the snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.

Press the “SNOW” switch.

The indicator will come on.

Press the switch once more to cancel the snow mode.

Changing shift ranges in S mode

Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 4.

172


■

Shift ranges and their functions

Shift range

5

4

3

2

Function

Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.




Setting the gear at 1.

1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

2

■ Downshifting restrictions

Keep the engine rpm from going into red zone.

The maximum allowable speed is as follows: mph (km/h)

Downshifting

4

→

3

3 → 2

2 → 1

Maximum speed

93 (150)

57 (92)

24 (39)

■

When driving with the cruise control system

The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting from 5 to 4. (

→ P. 200)

■

Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after driving in snow mode.

173


■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

→

P. 516

■ If the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to

S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

174


Turn signal lever

Left turn

Right turn

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

2

■ Turn signals can be operated when


■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

175


Parking brake

U.S.A. Canada

Sets the parking brake*

(Depress the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

*: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

176

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The following gauges and meters illuminate when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

2

177

2-2. Instrument cluster

Odometer/Trip meter

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

When the headlight switch is turned to ON, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the control dial is turned fully up.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. ( →

P. 524)

178


Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

2

Center panel (vehicles without navigation system)

179


Center panel (vehicles with navigation system)

■ Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

→ P. 175)

Headlight indicator

( →

P. 192)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(

→

P. 192)

Headlight high beam indicator (

→

P. 194)

* 1

(4WD models)

Downhill assist control system indicator

(

→

P. 207)

*

1

Slip indicator

(

→

P. 210)

(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator

(

→

P. 196)

“SNOW” indicator

(

→

P. 172)

*

1

SRS airbag on-off indicator ( →

P. 134)

Shift position and shift range indicators (

→

P. 171)

180


*

1 “VSC OFF” indicator

(

→ P. 211)

(if equipped)

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system indicator ( →

P. 110, 116)

Cruise control indicator

( →

P. 200)

■ Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (

→ P. 491)

* 1 * 1 * 1 * 1, 2 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1

(Canada) (U.S.A.)

*

1

*

1, 2

*

1

(Canada) (U.S.A.)

*

1

*

1, 2

*

1, 2

(Canada)

(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.)

* 4 * 5 * 3

2

* 1

:These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned to ON to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

* 2

: Vehicles without multi-information display

* 3

: Vehicles with multi-information display

* 4

: Vehicles without navigation system

* 5

: Vehicles with navigation system

181


CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

182


Multi-information display (if equipped)

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, including the current outside temperature and clock.

● Outside temperature

Indicates the outside temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F

(-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).

● Clock ( →

P. 186)

Indicates and sets the time.

●

Trip information (

→

P. 184)

Displays cruising range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related information.

●

Automatic air conditioning system display (if equipped)

(

→ P. 248)

Automatically displayed when the automatic air conditioning is turned on.

●

Rear view monitor

(

→

P. 203)

Automatically displayed when the shift lever is moved into the

R position.

●

Warning messages

(

→

P. 501)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.

183

2


Trip information

Push the “DISP” button to display trip information.

Display items can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button.

■

Average fuel consumption after refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.

■

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Displays the instantaneous fuel consumption.

■

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

■ Driving distance

Displays the driving distance since the engine was started.

■ Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

This function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

When the function is reset, the previous five average fuel consumption values will automatically be displayed for six seconds.

184


■

Average fuel consumption history

Displays the previous five average fuel consumption values.

Setting up the displays

STEP 1 Display the set up screen on the multi-information display when the vehicle is stopped.

Press and hold the “DISP” button to display the set up screen.

2

STEP 2 Select the desired item on the menu screen.

Press and hold the “DISP” button to enter the setting mode.

185


■

Setting the clock

STEP 1 Select “CLOCK” on the menu screen. Press and hold the

“DISP” button until the display changes.

STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the hours.

After adjusting the hours, wait 5 seconds to allow the hours to be automatically input.

STEP 3 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the minutes.

After adjusting the minutes, wait 5 seconds to allow the minutes to be automatically input.

186


■

Setting the display

STEP 1 Select “DISPLAY” on the menu screen. Press and hold the



Press and hold the “DISP” button to enter the setting mode.

2

●

Setting the day mode

STEP 1 Select “DAY MODE” on the menu screen. Press and hold the


STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to select “ON” or “OFF”.

After setting the day mode, wait 5 seconds to allow the mode to be automatically input.

●

Setting the background color

STEP 1 Select “BACKGROUND COLOR” on the menu screen. Press and hold the “DISP” button until the display changes.

STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to select “BLACK” or “BLUE”.

After selecting a background color, wait 5 seconds to allow the color to be automatically input.

187


●

Setting the brightness

STEP 1 Select “BRIGHTNESS” on the menu screen. Press and hold the “DISP” button until the display changes.

STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the brightness.

+: Brighter

-: Darker

After adjusting the brightness, wait 5 seconds to allow the brightness to be automatically input.

●

Setting the contrast

STEP 1 Select “CONTRAST” on the menu screen. Press and hold the


STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the contrast.

+: Strengthen

-: Weaken

After adjusting the contrast, wait 5 seconds to allow the contrast to be automatically input.

● Returning to the previous screen

Select “RETURN” on the menu screen. Press and hold the “DISP” button until the display changes.

188


Setting up the rear view monitor display

STEP 1 Display the set up screen on the multi-information display when the vehicle is stopped and the rear view monitor is turned on.

Press and hold the “DISP” button to display the set up screen.

2


Press and hold the “DISP” button to enter the adjustment mode.

■

Setting the brightness

STEP 1 Select “BRIGHTNESS” on the menu screen. Press and hold the “DISP” button until the display changes.

STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the brightness.

+: Brighter

-: Darker

After adjusting the brightness, wait 5 seconds to allow the brightness to be automatically input.

189


■

Setting the contrast

STEP 1 Select “CONTRAST” on the menu screen. Press and hold the


STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the contrast.

+: Strengthen

-: Weaken

After adjusting the contrast, wait 5 seconds to allow the contrast to be automatically input.

■

Setting the color

STEP 1 Select “COLOR” on the menu screen. Press and hold the


STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the color.

G: Green

R: Red

After selecting a color, wait 5 seconds to allow the color to be automatically input.

■ Setting the tone

STEP 1 Select “TONE” on the menu screen. Press and hold the


STEP 2 Press the “DISP” button to adjust the tone.

+: Brighter

-: Darker

After adjusting the tone, wait 5 seconds to allow the tone to be automatically input.

190


■ Returning to the previous screen

Select “RETURN” on the menu screen. Press and hold the “DISP” button until the display changes.

■ System check display

After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to

ON, SYSTEM CHECK is displayed while system operation is checked.

When the system check is complete, the normal screen will return.

■ Liquid crystal display

Small bright spots or dots may appear on the liquid crystal display. This is a particular characteristic of liquid crystal displays and does not indicate a malfunction. No action is required.


Setting (e.g. language selection) can be changed. (Customizable features

→

P. 558)

2

NOTICE

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

191

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Type A

U.S.A.

Canada

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights and

(if equipped) parking lights turn on and off automatically.

(When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON)

192

Type B

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights and parking lights turn on and off automatically.

(When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ON)

Daytime running light system is off.

2

193


Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

■ Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

194


■ Automatic light off system

The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after driver’s door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch has been switched to ACC or turned OFF.

To turn the lights on again, change the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to ON, or turn the headlight switch OFF and then back to

or position.


Settings (e.g. daytime running light system) can be deactivated.


P. 558)

2

NOTICE


Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

195


Fog light switch (if equipped)

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.

OFF

Front fog lights ON

196


Windshield wipers and washer

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

“INT” is selected).

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

2

Wash/wipe operation

Wipers operate automatically.

197


■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when


■ Intermittent windshield wiper interval (INT) mode

Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment (increase)

Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment (decrease)

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle is blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

198


Rear window wiper and washer

Intermittent window wiper operation

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

2

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when


NOTICE

■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.

199

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.

■

Set the vehicle speed

STEP 1 Turn the “ON-OFF” button ON.

Press the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and push the lever down to set the cruise control speed.

■

Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.

Fine adjustment of the set speed can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it.

200

2-4. Using other driving systems

■

Canceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

2

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in D, 4 or 5 range of S.

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Within the limits of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up or down grades.

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

■ Automatic cruise control cancellation

The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).

● Enhanced VSC is activated.

201


■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Contact your Toyota dealer and have your Toyota inspected.

CAUTION

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

202


Rear view monitor system (vehicles with multi-information display)

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in the R position.

If the shift lever is shifted out of

R, the screen returns to the previous one.

2

203


■ Displayed area

The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.

■ Rear view monitor system camera

In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.

● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.

● The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.

● Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains.

● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud, adheres to the camera lens.

● The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

204


■ Smear effect

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* characteristic to the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect : A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

■ Setting the rear view monitor system displays

→

P. 189

2

205


CAUTION

■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.

● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.

● Do not use the system if the back door is open.

■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold.

206


Downhill Assist Control system (4WD models only)

The downhill assist control system helps to prevent excessive speed on steep downhill slopes.

The system will operate when the vehicle is traveling under 15 mph

(25km/h) and shift lever is in the 1 range in S mode or R position.

■

System operation

Press the “DAC” switch. The indicator will come on, and the system will operate.

There may be a malfunction in a system if the indicator light does not come on.

When the system is in operation, the slip indicator light will flash, and the stop light/high mounted stoplight will be lit. A sound may also occur during the operation. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■

Turning off the system

Press the “DAC” switch while the system is in operation. The indicator will flash as the system gradually ceases operation, and will turn off when the system is fully off.

Press the “DAC” switch while the indicator is flashing to start the system again.

2

■ Operating tips

If the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the shift lever may not be in 1 range of S mode or R position.

■ If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (Do not continue normal driving.)

207


■ System malfunction

● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned to ON.

● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the

“DAC” switch is pressed. In the above cases have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ Conditions which may affect the downhill assist control system

The system may not operate on the following surfaces, which may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Slippery surface such as wet or muddy roads

● Icy surfaces

● Unpaved roads

208


Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.

■ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

■

Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels (2WD models) or four wheels (4WD models) from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■

Hill-start assist control

Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on incline or slippery slope.

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.

2

209


When the Enhanced VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or the front wheels (2WD models) or four wheels (4WD models) spin, the indicator flashes to indicate that the Enhanced VSC/TRAC/hillstart assist control systems have been engaged.

A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that Enhanced VSC is operating.

The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hillstart assist control system is operating.

To disable TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and Enhanced

VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■

Turning off TRAC

Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.

The slip indicator light should come on.

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

210


■

Turning off TRAC and Enhanced VSC

Push and hold the button while the vehicle is stopped to turn off

TRAC and Enhanced VSC.

The slip indicator light and VSC

OFF indicator light should come on.

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

2

■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and Enhanced VSC

Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and Enhanced VSC systems will automatically reenable them.

■ Automatic TRAC reactivation

If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases.

■ Automatic TRAC and Enhanced VSC reactivation

If the TRAC and Enhanced VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, Enhanced VSC, brake assist and hill-start assist control

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

211


■ Hill-start assist control is operational when

● The shift lever is in the D or S position.

● The brake pedal is not depressed.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS

The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

CAUTION

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick road.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

212


CAUTION

■ If the hillstart assist control does not operate effectively

The hill start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.

■ When the Enhanced VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.

■ When TRAC and Enhanced VSC are off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and Enhanced VSC unless necessary.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level.

The ABS and Enhanced VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

2

213

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle feature

● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.

● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

214

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

2

215


Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.

● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.

● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■

Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.

●

State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

● State Motor Vehicle Bureau

●

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

●

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

216


CAUTION

■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

2

NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

217


NOTICE

■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■ Inspection after off-road driving

● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

218


Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

●

Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.

●

Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

●

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. 2

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

⎯

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5

×

150)

= 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

219


(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 1200 lb. (544 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

1200 lb. - 366 lb. = 834 lb. (544 kg -166 kg = 378 kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of

388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

834 lb. - 388 lb. = 446 lb. (378 kg - 176 kg = 202 kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

220


CAUTION

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

● Do not place anything on the luggage cover, and do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.

• Driver’s feet

• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• Luggage cover

• Instrument panel

• Dashboard

• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

2

221


CAUTION

■ Roof luggage carrier precautions

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.

When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:

Roof rails

Cross rails

● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.

( →

P. 530)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 100 lb. (45 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

■ Cross rail adjustment

Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them.

Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

222


Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: 1200 lb. (544 kg)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 or 7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3 or 5)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

■ Towing capacity

Without towing package: 2000 lb. (900 kg)

With towing package: 5000 lb. (2000 kg)

Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

■ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

2

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (

→ P. 444)

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

223


Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■

Pre-winter preparations

●

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

●

Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

●

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle

Observe the following according to the driving conditions.

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.

Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

●

Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

224


■

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

■

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.

2

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

Regulations on the use of snow chains

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

● Install the chains on the front tires.

● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

225


■ Tire chains

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires.

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying manual.

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden turns and braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

226


NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

2

227


Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.

Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions.

The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kits, etc.

228


Weight limits

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

lb. (kg)

Without towing package

With towing package

Towing capacity

2000(900)

5000(2000)

2

●

The gross trailer weight must never exceed towing capacity described in the table above.

● The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated the Certification Label.

● The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the

GAWR indicated the Certification Label.

229


Towing related term

Towing related term

GVWR (Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating)

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

Rating)

Gross trailer weight

Towing capacity

Tongue load

Meaning

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load.

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

The sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. Towing capacity is calculated considering the base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and occupants.

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, gross trailer weight include the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball

230


Trailer tongue load

● A recommended tongue load varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.

● In order to ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the gross trailer weight, not exceeding the following.

Without towing package: 200 lb. (90 kg)

With towing package: 500 lb. (200 kg)

(Tongue load / Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)

If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lbs. (900 kg), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity.

The gross trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

Gross trailer weight

Tongue load

2

231


Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.

●

Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

●

Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle.

●

Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

●

As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

●

Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

●

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

●

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turns.

232


●

Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a larger than normal turning radius.

●

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

●

Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

●

In order to maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a long steep downgrade, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift range position must be in 4, in the S mode.

●

Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(

→

P. 524)

2

233


●

Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

STEP 1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

STEP 2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

STEP 3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

STEP 4 Apply the parking brake firmly.

STEP 5 Shift into P and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:

STEP 1 With the transmission in the P position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.

STEP 2 Shift into 3, 2, 1, or the R position (if reversing).

STEP 3 Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

STEP 4 Have someone retrieve the blocks.

234


■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (

→ P. 538)

● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation.

● All trailer lights work

● All lights work each time you connect them.

● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.

Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.

● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components

(such as an engine, transmission, differential and wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until it has been driven for over

2000 miles (3200 km).

However, avoid full throttle acceleration.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

2

235


CAUTION

■ Trailer towing precautions

● Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Exceeding the towing capacity, GVWR or GAWR can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.

● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About

60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining

40% in the rear.

● Do not use cruise control when you are towing.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.

■ Hitches

● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement.

● The towing capacity of 5000 lb (2000 kg) can only be guaranteed when using a genuine Toyota hitch assembly or equivalent.

● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.

● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

236


CAUTION

■ When towing a trailer

● If the gross trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (453 kg), trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

2

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

● Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

■ Safety chain

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.

237


Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.

238


2

239

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ................ 242

Front manual air conditioning system ....... 242

Front automatic air conditioning system ....... 248

Rear manual air conditioning system ....... 256

Rear automatic air conditioning system ....... 259

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers....................... 262

Windshield wiper de-icer............................ 264

Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ......................... 265

3-2. Using the audio system .......................... 266

Audio system ................... 266

Using the radio................. 269

Using the CD player......... 275

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs..................... 282

Optimal use of the audio system ........................... 289

Using the AUX adapter .... 292

Using the steering wheel audio switches ............... 294

3-3. Using the rear audio system .......................... 296

Rear seat entertainment system features ............. 296


(DVD video) ................... 303


(video CD)...................... 311


(audio CD/CD text) ........ 313


(MP3 discs) .................... 314

Using the video mode ...... 316

Changing the initial setting ............................ 318

240


3

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone) ...... 325


(for cellular phone) features.......................... 325

Using the hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone)......... 329

Making a phone call ......... 336

Setting a cellular phone............................. 340

Security and system setup .............................. 345

Using the phone book ...... 348

3-6. Using the storage

features ........................ 358

List of storage features .... 358

• Glove box....................... 359

• Console box ................... 359

• Overhead console.......... 360

• Cup holders ................... 362

• Bottle holders ................. 366

• Auxiliary boxes............... 367

• Side table ....................... 369

3-5. Using the interior lights ............................. 355

Interior lights list ............... 355

• Personal/interior light main switch .................... 356

• Personal/interior lights .............................. 356

• Interior light .................... 357

3-7. Other interior features ......................... 371

Sun visors ........................ 371

Vanity mirror..................... 372

Clock (vehicles without multi-information display) .......................... 373

Conversation mirror ......... 374

Power outlets ................... 375

Seat heaters..................... 378

Armrests........................... 380

Floor mat.......................... 381

Luggage compartment features .......................... 382

Garage door opener......... 388

Compass.......................... 393

241

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front manual air conditioning system (if equipped)

Fan speed control dial

Temperature control dial

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Air outlet selection dial

Rear air conditioning

ON/OFF switch*

Air conditioning ON/OFF switch

*: If equipped

Adjusting the settings

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

For quick cooling, turn the temperature selector knob to the “MAX A/C” position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on in culated air) mode.

(recir-

■

Adjusting the fan speed

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

Turn the dial to “OFF” to turn the fan off.

242

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■

Changing the air outlets

Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can be also selected for more detailed adjustment.

Upper body

: Vehicles without rear air conditioning system

Upper body and feet

3


Feet


243


Without rear air conditioning system

Feet and windshield

With rear air conditioning system

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator OFF) and recirculated air mode (indicator ON) modes each time is pressed.

244


Defogging the front windshield

Set the air outlet selection dial to

position.

The air conditioning system control operates automatically.

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

3

Right and left side outlets


Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

245


Rear center outlets (vehicles without rear air conditioning system)



■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

■ Window defogger feature

In order to prevent the windows from fogging up, recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode if the ambient temperature drops.

This feature can be cancelled by pushing and holding the air intake mode switch for longer than 2 seconds. The feature will be reactivated when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

■ When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

■ When is selected for the air outlets used is pressed.

For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature adjustment dial.

246


CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE


Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

3

247


Front automatic air conditioning system (if equipped)

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Control panel

Temperature control for rear passengers

Windshield defogger

Automatic mode

Driver's side temperature control dial

Rear air conditioning

ON/OFF switch

Fan speed

Outside air recirculated air mode

Individual mode

Off

Changes the air outlets used

Simultaneous mode

Front passenger’s side temperature control dial

Air conditioning

ON/OFF switch

Vehicles with rear air conditioning system

Vehicles without rear air conditioning system

248



Airflow display Fan speed display

Driver’s side temperature setting display

Temperature setting display for rear passengers

Front passengers side temperature setting display

3

Using the automatic mode

STEP 1 Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

“AUTO” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

STEP 2 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be set separately depending on the temperature setting.

249





The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time (without rear air conditioning system) or (with rear air conditioning system) is pressed.

Simultaneous mode: Only the driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

The indicator status will be as follows:

Without rear air conditioning system: (off)

With rear air conditioning system: (on)

Individual mode: The temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (

→

P. 259) can be adjusted separately. Operat-

ing the passenger's side or rear (with rear air conditioning system) temperature control will enter individual mode.

The indicator status will be as follows:

Without rear air conditioning system: (on)

With rear air conditioning system:

■ Adjusting the fan speed

(off)

Press “ ∧ ” (increase) or “ ∨ ” (decrease) on or .

The fan speed is shown on the multi-information display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

250


■

Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets switch each time either side of flow shown on the display indicates the following.

Upper body

is pressed. The air


Upper body and feet

3


Feet


251



Feet and windshield


■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator OFF) and recirculated air mode (indicator ON) modes each time is pressed.

252


Changing the rear seat settings (if equipped)


Press “ ∧ ” on to increase the temperature and “ ∨ ” to decrease the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

Defogging the windshield

Press

.

The air conditioning system control operates automatically.

3

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets


253


Front side outlets



Rear center outlets (vehicles without rear air conditioning system)



Air outlets of the rear seat. ( → P. 261)

■


Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.

●

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

●

Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

254


■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to in situations where the windows need to be defogged.

■ When outside temperature approaches 32 ° F (0 ° C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

(outside air) mode is pressed.

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

3

NOTICE



255


Rear manual air conditioning system (if equipped)


Changes the air outlet used

Fan speed control dial Temperature control dial

256





■ Changing the air outlets

Press the desired , or .

Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.

Upper body

3

Upper body and feet

257


Feet




Roof side outlets


NOTICE



258


Rear automatic air conditioning system (if equipped)


Fan speed display

Airflow display Temperature setting display

Fan speed control dial

Off

Automatic mode

Changes the air outlet used

Temperature control dial

3


STEP 1 Press .

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.

“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.

STEP 2 Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

259





■ Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets change as follows each time is pressed.

Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.

Upper body

Upper body and feet

260


Feet



3

Press to turn the fan off.


Roof side outlets


NOTICE



261


Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

Clear the rear window using the defogger.

Vehicles with manual air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the rear window defogger. The indicator light will come on.

The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. Pressing the button again also turns the defogger off.

Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers

Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the rear window defogger. The indicator light will come on.

The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed. Pressing the button again also turns the defogger off.

Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers

Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

262


■ The defogger can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in the ON.

■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION

■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch them to prevent from burning yourself.

3

263


Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

On/off

Press the button to turn on the windshield wiper de-icer. The indicator light will come on.

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

■ The de-icer can be operated when


CAUTION

■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

264


Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches (if equipped)

Some air conditioning features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Temperature control

Off

Automatic mode


STEP 1

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.

“AUTO” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

STEP 2 Press “

∧

” on to increase the temperature and “

∨

” to decrease the temperature.

Adjusting the temperature setting

Press “ ∧ ” on the temperature.

to increase the temperature and “ ∨ ” to decrease

Turning off the fan

Press .

3

265

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system

Type A: CD player and AM/FM radio (with CD changer controller)

Type B: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

266

3-2. Using the audio system

Type C: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

Title

Using the radio

Using the CD player

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Optimal use of the audio system

Using the AUX adapter

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Page

P. 269

P. 275

P. 282

P. 289

P. 292

P. 294

■

Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

3

267


CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE


Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine is off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

268


Using the radio

Power Volume

Scanning for receivable stations

Station selector

Seeking the frequency

*: Type B and C

AM/AM

·

SAT*/FM mode buttons

Adjusting the frequency

(AM, FM mode) or channel

(SAT mode)

Changing the program type

Setting station presets (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

STEP 1 Search for desired stations by turning the or pressing

“ ∧ ” or “

∨

” on .

STEP 2 Press and hold the button (from to be set to, and you hear a beep.

to ) the station is

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio)

■

Scanning the preset radio stations

STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press once again.

269

3


■

Scanning all radio stations within range

STEP 1 Press .

All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press once again.

XM

®

Satellite Radio (type B and C)

■

Receiving XM

®

Satellite Radio

STEP 1 Press and hold until SAT appears in the display.

The display changes as follows each time pressed.

AM

→

SAT1

→

SAT2

→

SAT3

is

STEP 2 Turn to select the desired channel in all categories, or press “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on to select the desired channel in the current category.

■ Setting XM

®

Satellite Radio channel presets

Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to (from to ), and you hear a beep.

■ Changing the channel category

Press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on the .

■

Scanning XM

®

Satellite Radio channels

● Scanning channels in the current category

STEP 1

STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press again.

270


●

Scanning preset channels


STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press again.

■

Displaying text information

Press .

The display will show up to 10 characters.

The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.

●

CH NAME

●

TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)

●

NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)

●

CH NUMBER

Silencing a sound (type A only)

Press .

3

271


■ When the battery is disconnected

Stations presets are erased.

■ Reception sensitivity

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● Mast type antenna ⎯ The radio antenna is mounted on the right-side front fender. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it.

● Print type antenna ⎯ The radio antenna is mounted inside the left-side rear quarter window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the left-side rear quarter window.

■ XM

®

Satellite Radio (type B and C)

The optional Toyota genuine satellite radio tuner and antenna allows you to receive and play XM

®

Satellite Radio broadcasts. (Subscription is required.

Not available in Hawaii and Alaska.) *

● XM

XM

®

subscriptions

For detailed information about XM

®

Satellite Radio or to subscribe, visit

®

on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM

®

Satellite Radio.

* : Terms and services provided by XM

®

Satellite Radio are subject to change without notice.

272


■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally (type B and C)

If a problem occurs with the XM

®

tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNA

UPDATING

NO SIGNAL

LOADING

OFF AIR

-----

The XM

®

antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM

®

antenna cable is attached securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to the XM

®

Satellite

Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM

®

Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM

®

Satellite Radio.

The XM

®

signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

3

273


---

The channel you selected is no longer available.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM ®

*

.

Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 during the following hours

Monday - Saturday: 6 a.m. - 2 a.m. Eastern Time

Sunday: 8 a.m. - 8 p.m. Eastern Time

*

: Subject to change without notice.

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases.

(mast type antenna)

● The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.

● A cover will be put on the vehicle.

274


Using the CD player

Power Volume

CD eject

Search playback

Reverse

CD slot

Display text message

Fast-forward

CD insert

(type B and C)

Track selection

Playback

CD selection (with a CD changer)

Repeat play

Random playback

3

Loading CDs

■

Loading a CD

Type A

Insert a CD.

Type B and C

STEP 1 Press .

“WAIT” is shown on the display.

STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

275


■

Loading multiple CDs (type B and C)


“WAIT” is shown on the display.

STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

STEP 3 Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To stop the operation, press .

Ejecting CDs

■ Ejecting a CD

Type A

Press and remove the CD.

Type B and C

STEP 1 To select the CD to be ejected, press ( ∨ ) or

The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.

( ∧ ).

STEP 2 Press and remove the CD.

■

Ejecting all the CDs (type B and C)

Press and hold

CDs.

until you hear a beep, and then remove the

Selecting a track

Press “ ∧ ” to move up or “ ∨ ” to move down using desired track number is displayed.

until the

276


Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “ ∧ ” or “

∨

” on .

Scanning tracks

STEP 1 Press .

The first ten seconds of each track will be played.

STEP 2 Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.

Selecting a CD (with a CD changer)

■

To select a CD to play

To select the desired CD, press (

∨

) or (

∧

).

■

To scan loaded CDs


The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

STEP 2 Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached.

Repeat play

■

To repeat a track

■

To repeat all of the tracks on a CD (CD player with changer only)

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

3

277


Random playback

■ Current CD

Tracks are played in a random order until the button is pressed once more.

■

All CDs (with a CD changer)

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the button is pressed once more.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of

“Track no./Elapsed time”

→

“CD title”

→

“Track name”.


→ P. 271

278


■ Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or more will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

for 1 second

If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for

6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

■ Canceling random and repeat playback

Press (RAND),

■ Error messages

(RPT) or again.

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

3

CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.

■

CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

■

If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

279


NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual

Disc.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7

in. (12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-

R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

280


NOTICE

■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

● Do not apply oil to the CD player.

● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.

3

281


Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Power Volume

CD eject Reverse

Search playback

CD slot

Fast-forward

Display text message

CD insert

(type B and C)

File selection

File selection

Playback

CD selection (with a CD changer)

Folder selection

Repeat play

Random playback

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

→

P. 275

Selecting a CD (with a CD changer)

→ P. 277

282


Selecting and scanning a folder

■ Selecting folders one at a time

Press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired folder.

■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder

Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press once again.

■

Returning to the first folder

3

Press and hold “

∨

” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting and scanning files

■

Selecting one file at a time

Turn the or press “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on to select the desired file.

■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Press .

When the desired file is reached, press once again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on .

283


Repeat play

■ To repeat a file

■ To repeat all of the files on a folder

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Random playback

■

To play files from a particular folder in random order

■

To play all of the files on a disc in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of

“Folder no./File no./Elapsed time”

→

“Folder name”

→

“File name”

→

“Album title” (MP3 only)

→

“Track title”

→

“Artist name”.


→ P. 271

284


■ Display

→

P. 279

■ Canceling random and repeat playback

→

P. 279

■ Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the

CD.


→

P. 279

■ CD player protection feature

→

P. 279

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

→

P. 279

■ Lens cleaners

→

P. 279

3

285


■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media

TM

Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

286


● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.

3

287


● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

→ P. 280

■ CD player precautions

→ P. 281

288


Optimal use of the audio system

Displays the current mode

Changes the following setting

●

Sound quality and volume balance (

→

P. 290)

The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound.

●

Automatic Sound Levelizer ON/OFF

(

→

P. 291)

●

Rear seat entertainment system lock ON/OFF

(

→

P. 291)

3

289


Using the audio control function

■ Changing sound quality modes

Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following order.

“BAS”

→

“MID*

1

”

→

“TRE”

→

“FAD”

→

“BAL”

→

“ASL”

→

“RSE*

2

”

*

1

: Type C only

*

2

: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system

■

Adjusting sound quality

Turning adjusts the level.

Mode displayed

BAS

MID

TRE

FAD

BAL

Sound quality mode

Bass*

Mid-range*

(type C only)

Treble*

Front/rear volume balance

Left/right volume balance

Level

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

R7 to F7

L7 to R7

Turn to the left

Low

Shifts to rear

Shifts to left

Turn to the right

High

Shifts to front

Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or

CD mode.

290


■

Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

Type A and B

When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the amount of “ASL” in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.

Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

Type C

3

When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right turns “ASL” on, and turning to the left turns “ASL” off.

“ASL” automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.

■

Setting the rear seat entertainment system lock (if equipped)

When “RSE” is selected, turn

until “ON”/“OFF” is displayed.

The rear seat entertainment system lock remains on, even when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned off.

291


Using the AUX adapter

This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

STEP 1 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

Vehicles without seat heater

Vehicles with seat heater

STEP 2 Press .

292


■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.

3

293


Using the steering wheel audio switches (if equipped)

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Volume

Radio: Selects radio stations

CD: Selects tracks, files

(MP3 and WMA) and discs

Turns the power on, selects audio source

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned OFF.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a beep.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

CD player without changer:

FM1 → FM2 → CD → AUX → AM

CD player with changer:

FM1

→

FM2

→

CD changer

→

AUX

→

AM

→

SAT1

→

SAT2

→

SAT3

294


Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on volume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the radio mode.

Press “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on to select a preset station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the CD mode.

Press “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on to select the desired track/file.

3

Selecting a folder (CD player without changer only)

STEP 1

STEP 2


Press and hold “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player (CD player with changer only)

STEP 1

STEP 2


Press and hold “ ∧ ” or “ ∨ ” on until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

295

3-3. Using the rear audio system

Rear seat entertainment system features (if equipped)

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.

296

Front audio system

Power outlet main switch

Display

Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks

DVD player

Rear seat entertainment system controller

Power outlet

A/V input adapter

3-3. Using the rear audio system

Opening and closing the display

Press the lock release button to open the display.

Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90 ° and

125 ° ).

To close the display, push the display up until a click is heard.

The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

3

Loading a disc

Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up.

The “DISC” indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.

The player will play the track or chapter, and will repeat it after it reaches the end.

297


Ejecting a disc

Press and remove the disc.

Headphone jacks

To use the headphones, connect them to the jack.

To adjust the volume

Right side dial: Turn it toward the front of the vehicle to increase the volume. Turn it toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease the volume.

Left side dial: Turn it toward the rear of the vehicle to increase the volume. Turn it toward the front of the vehicle to decrease the volume.

298


■ The rear seat entertainment system can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ACC or ON.


Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

■ When appears on the screen

It indicates that the selected switch cannot work.

■

Rear system lock

→

P. 291

■

Error messages

DISC CHECK: Indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

REGION ERROR: Indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.

DVD ERROR: Indicates that there is a problem inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take the vehicle to your

Toyota dealer.

3

299


■ Before using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners)


STEP 2 Remove the insulating sheet.

■ When the remote controller battery is fully depleted

Remove the depleted batteries and install new 3AA batteries.

■

If the remote controller batteries are discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

●

The rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly.

●

The operational range is reduced.

■

When using 3 AA batteries

Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

300


■ Headphones

With some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch signals properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphones.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

■ Volume

● Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.

● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the

DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

3

CAUTION


Do not use headphones.

Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the rear seat entertainment system is not used

Keep the display closed.

In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant's body, resulting in injury.

■ To prevent accidents and electric shock

Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller.

■ When the remote controller is not used

Stow the remote controller.


■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

301


NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

302


Using the DVD player (DVD video)

■

Remote controller

■

Unit

Turning on the DVD mode

Selecting a chapter

Reversing a disc

Turning on the menu screen

Turning on the title selection screen

Searching the title

Changing the screen angle

Inputting the selected switch (icon)

Selecting a switch (icon)

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast forwarding a disc

Stopping a disc

Changing the subtitle language

Changing the audio language

3

Turning on the DVD mode

Skipping to the desired chapter


Selecting a switch (icon)/ inputting the selected switch (icon)

303


■

Display (Page 1)

■ Display (Page 2)

Turning off the operation switches (icon) on the display

Displaying page 2

Turning on or off the title selection screen for the disc

Turning on or off the menu screen for the disc

Reversing a disc

Stopping a disc

Pausing the disc/canceling the pause


Displaying the initial setting screen

Displaying page 1

Search for a title

Returning to the previous screen

Changing the audio language

Changing the subtitle language

Changing the angle

304


NOTICE

■ Cleaning the display

Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth.

If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.

■ To prevent damage to the remote controller

● Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, temperature heat and high humidity.

● Do not drop or knock the remote controller against hard objects.

● Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller.

■ DVD player

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

3

Turning on or off the operation switches

Press

Press

or

or tion switches.

to turn on the operation switches.

once again or select to turn off the opera-

Turning on the title selection screen

Press or select to turn on the title selection screen. For the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Turning on the menu screen

Press or select to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

305


Returning to the previous screen

Select to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Searching for a title

Press or select to display the screen to search for a title.

Select the title number, and press

to input it.

Select vious screen.

to return to the pre-

Changing the subtitle language

Press or select to display the subtitle language screen.

Each time is pressed or

is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.



306


Changing the audio language

Changing the angle

Press or select to display the audio language screen.


is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.



3

Press or select to display the screen to change the angle.


is selected, the angle changes.



307


■ DVD player and DVD video discs

This DVD player is compatible NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.

■ Region codes

Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use them. If the DVD video disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the

DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it.

■ Marks shown on DVD video discs

Indicates NTSC format of color TV.

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played.

ALL: all countries

Number: region code

308


■ DVD video disc glossary

● DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that holds world’s standard video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been adopted in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

● Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

• Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

● Multi-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different angles.

● Multi-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles and audio.

● Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the

DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player.

● Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played.

● Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided into sections by title and chapter.

● Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

● Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters.

3

309


■ Audio

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and are trademarks of Dolby



Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

1992-1997 Dolby



Laboratories. All rights reserved.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

310


Using the DVD player (video CD)

■

Remote controller

■

Unit


Selecting a chapter


Reversing a disc

Displaying operation switches (icon)



Stopping a disc

Changing the initial setting

3

Skipping to the desired chapter




311


■

Display (page 1)

■

Display (page 2)

Selecting a disc menu number

Turning off the menu screen

Displaying page 2

Turning on the disc menu

Returning to the previous page screen (with the disc menu displayed)

Proceeding to the next page screen (with the disc menu displayed)

Changing to a multiplex transmission

Displaying page 1

Reversing a disc

Pausing the disc/canceling the pause


Selecting a disc menu number

Select to display the disc menu number search screen.

Select the disc menu number, and press

Select to return to the previous screen.

to input it.

312


Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text)

Using the control screen, the control screen.

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

■

Canceling random, repeat and scan play

3

313


Using the DVD player (MP3 discs)

■

Using the control screen

Press or play the control screen.

to dis-

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

Displaying file information

Selecting a folder

Repeat play

■ Repeat a file

■ Repeat all of files in a folder

Select , and press and hold on the remote controller.

Random playback

■

Playing files from a particular folder in random order

■

Playing all of the files on a disc in random order

Select , and press and hold on the remote controller.

Search playback

■

Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

314

The player will scan all the files in the folder. Each file will be played for 10 seconds.


■

Selecting the desired file by cueing the folders on the disc

Select , and press and hold the remote controller.

The player will scan all the folders on the disc. The first file in each folder will be played for 10 seconds.

■ Canceling random, repeat and play back

Select , or again.

3

315


Using the video mode

Press or the video mode.

to select

Before switching to the video mode, connect the audio source to the A/V input adapter.

Using the adapter

Open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

White: Left channel audio input adapter

Red: Right channel audio input adapter

■

A/V input adapter

The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audiovideo equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.

■

Power outlet

The power outlet is used to connect the audio device. (

→

P. 375)

316


NOTICE

■ When the A/V input adapter is not in use

Keep the A/V input adapter cover closed.

Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or short circuit.

3

317


Changing the initial setting

Press or select to display the initial setting screen.

The following initialization can be changed here.

●

Audio language

● Subtitle language

●

DVD language

●

Angle mark

● Parental lock

Changing the audio language

Select “Audio Language”.

Select the language you want to hear, and press to input it.

Select “Others” if you cannot find the language you want to hear.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (

→

P. 322)

Select a number, and press

to input it.

If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen.

318


Changing the subtitle language

Select “Subtitle Language”.

Select the language you want to read, and press to input it.

Select “Others” if you cannot find the language you want to read.


→

P. 322)


3

to input it.


319


Changing the DVD language

Select “DVD Language”.

Select the language you want to read and press to input it.

Select “Others” if you cannot find the language you want to read.


→

P. 322)


to input it.


Turning on or off the angle mark

The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible.

Each time you press turns on or off alternately.

when “Angle Mark” is selected, the angle mark

320


Setting viewer restriction levels

Setting a password allows the viewer restriction to be effective.

Select “Parental Lock”.

Enter the password and press

.

The setting cannot be changed unless the password is entered.

When you forget the password, initialize the password. (

→ P. 322)

Select a restriction level (1-8),

3 and press . The smaller the level number, the stricter the age limit.

Setting the display mode

Pressing changes the display modes sequentially as follows:

Normal → Wide 1 → Wide 2

321


■ Returning to the previous screen

Select , and press .

■

To initialize the password

Press on the remote controller or unit ten times when the screen to enter the personal code is displayed.

■

Language code list

1412

1620

1922

1821

1115

0512

0101

0102

Code

0514

0618

0405

0920

0519

2608

0106

0113

0118

0119

0125

0126

0201

0205

0207

Language

English

French

German

Italian

Spanish

Chinese

Dutch

Portuguese

Swedish

Russian

Korean

Greek

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Amharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

0315

0319

0325

0401

0426

0515

0520

0521

Code

0208

0209

0214

0215

0218

0301

0601

0609

0610

0615

0625

0701

0704

0712

0714

Language

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Frisian

Irish

Scots-Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

322

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian

Malagasy

Maori

Language

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Japanese

Yiddish

1125

1201

1214

1215

1220

1222

1307

1309

1023

1101

1111

1112

1113

1114

1119

1121

0901

0905

0911

0914

0919

0923

1001

1009

Code

0721

0801

0809

0818

1821

1825


Language

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Punjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Romanian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Sinhalese

Slovak

Slovenian

Samoan

1901

1904

1907

1908

1909

1911

1912

1913

1601

1612

1619

1721

1813

1814

1815

1823

1320

1325

1401

1405

1415

1503

1513

1518

Code

1311

1312

1314

1315

1318

1319

3

323


1921

1923

2001

2005

2007

2008

2009

2011

2012

Code

1914

1915

1917

1918

1919

1920

■ Adjusting the screen

Language

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

Turkmen

Tagalog

Brightness

Contrast

Tone

Color

Code

2014

2015

2018

2019

2020

2023

2111

2118

2126

2209

2215

2315

2408

2515

2621

Language

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapük

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Press .

Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color, and make adjustments. Press

or to input it.

“-” or “Red”

Darkens

Weakens the contrast

Weakens the tone

Strengthens the red color

“+” or “Green”

Brightens

Strengthens the contrast

Strengthens the tone

Strengthens the green color

324

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) features (if equipped)

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

This system supports Bluetooth

®

, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.

Title

Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Making a phone call

Setting a cellular phone

Security and system setup

Using the phone book

Page

P. 329

P. 336

P. 340

P. 345

P. 348

3

■ When using the hands-free system

● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear.

● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

● In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If the window is open

• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If the air conditioning is set to high

325

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth

®

● If the mobile phone is switched off

● If you are outside service range

● If the mobile phone is not connected

● If the mobile phone's battery is low

■ Bluetooth

®

antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

■ Signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.

■ About Bluetooth

®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push

Profile) Ver. 1.1.

If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth

® phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth

®

phone.

326


■ Certification for the hands-free phone system

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A

IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:







3

327


FCC WARNING:


CAUTION:

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth, for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).

Co-location:

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

CAUTION


Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth ® phone.

NOTICE

■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone.

328


Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) (if equipped)

■

Audio unit

Displays such items as messages, names, and phone numbers

Lower-case characters and special characters, such as an umlaut, cannot be displayed.

Push and hold: Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the screen

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as menu or numbers

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected item

Displays the reception level

Displays Bluetooth

®

connection condition

If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.

3

329


■

Steering wheel telephone switches

Volume

The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted by using this switch.


OFF/ends a call/refuses a call


ON/starts a call

Press: Voice command system on

Press and hold: Voice command system off

■

Microphone

330


Operating the system by using a voice command

By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands can be given to allow for operation of the handsfree phone system without checking the display or operating .

■ Operation procedure when using a voice command

Press

(

→ P. 333)

and say a command for a desired function.

■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command

The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:

Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone system

Repeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

Go back: Returns to the previous procedure

Help: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

3

331


Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:

STEP 1

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard.

STEP 2 Register a phone name by either of the following methods.

a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be registered.

b. Press and say a name to be registered.

Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

STEP 3 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.

STEP 4 Input the passkey into the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

332


Menu list of the hands-free phone system

■ Normal operation

First menu

Second menu

Third menu

Callback

Redial

-

-

-

-

Operation detail

Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

Dial by number

Dial by name

-

-

-

-

-

-

Dialing by inputting a number

Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book

Adding a new number

Changing a name in the phone book

Phonebook

Add Entry

Change

Name

Delete

Entry

Delete

Speed

Dial

(Del Spd

Dial)

List

Names

Set

Speed

Dial

(Speed

Dial)

-

-

-

-

Deleting the phone book data

Deleting a registered speed dial

Listing the phone book data

Registering a speed dial

3

333


First menu

Second menu

Security

Third menu

Set PIN

Phonebook

Lock

Phonebook

Unlock

Pair Phone

Setup

Phone

Setup

Change Name

Delete

List Phones

Select Phone

System

Setup

Set Passkey

Guidance Volume

(Guidance Vol)

Initialize

■

Using a short cut key

First menu Second menu

Dial “XXX (name)”

Phone book add entry

Phone book change name

-

-

Operation detail

Setting a PIN code

Locking the phone book

Unlocking the phone book

Registering a cellular phone to be used

Changing a registered name of a cellular phone

Deleting a registered cellular phone

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

Changing the passkey

Setting voice guidance volume

Initialization

Operation detail

Dialing a number registered in the phone book

Adding a new number

Changing a name of a phone number in the phone book

334


First menu

Phone book delete entry

Phone book set speed dial

Phone book delete speed dial

Phonebook

Second menu

-

-

-

Phonebook Unlock

Phonebook Lock

Operation detail

Deleting phone book data

Registering speed dial

Deleting speed dial


Locking the phone book

■

Automatic adjustment of volume

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

■

When using a voice command

●

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, #

(pound),

∗

(star), and + (plus).

●

Say a command correctly and clearly.

■

The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:

●

When driving on a rough road

●

When driving at high speeds

●

When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

●

When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

■

The following cannot be performed while driving:

3

● Operating the system with

● Registering a cellular phone to the system

■ Changing the passkey

→

P. 343

335


Making a phone call

■

Making a phone call

● Dialing by inputting a number

“Dial by number”

●

Dialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

●

Speed dialing

●

Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

●

Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

“Call back”

■ Receiving a phone call

●

Answering the phone

● Refusing the call

■

Transferring a call

■

Using a call history memory

● Dialing

●

Storing data in the phone book

●

Deleting

Dialing by inputting a number

STEP 1 Press

STEP 2 Press

and say “Dial by number”.

and say the phone number.

336


STEP 3 Dial by one of the following methods: b. Press and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Dialing by inputting a name

STEP 1 Press and say “Dial by name”.

STEP 2 Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press and say a registered name.

b. Press and say “List names”. Press desired name is being read aloud.

STEP 3 Dial by one of the following methods:

while the

3 b. Press and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Speed dialing

STEP 1

STEP 2 Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.

STEP 3

337


When receiving a phone call

■ Answering the phone

■ Refusing the call

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

c. Press and say “Call Transfer”

*2

.

*1

: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

*2

: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone.

Using a call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in call history memory:

STEP 1 Press and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming history memory).

338


STEP 2 Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.

b. Select the desired number by using

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press

.

or select “Dial” by using a voice command or

.

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a

3 voice command or .

Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

■ Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history memories.

■ When talking on the phone

● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.

● Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.

339


Setting a cellular phone

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following function can be used for registered cellular phones:

■

Functions and operation procedures

To enter menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a voice command or :

●

Registering a cellular phone

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Pair Phone”

●

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

1. “Setup”

→


→

3. “Select Phone”

●

Changing a registered name

1. “Setup”

→


→

3. “Change Name”

●

Listing the registered cellular phones

1. “Setup”

→


→

3. “List Phones”

●

Deleting a cellular phone

1. “Setup”

→


→

3. “Delete”

●

Changing the passkey

1. “Setup”

→


→

3. “Set Passkey”

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or procedure for registering a cellular phone. (

→ P. 332)

, and do the

340


Selecting a cellular phone to be used

STEP 1 Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

STEP 2 Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press and say the desired phone name.

b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press

Pattern B

STEP 2 Select a cellular phone to be used by using .

.

3

Changing a registered name

STEP 1 Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

STEP 2 Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press .

c. Select the desired phone name by using .

341


STEP 3 Press or select “Record Name” by using say a new name.

STEP 4 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

, and

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or begins reading aloud the list of the registered cellular phones.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

Pressing while a name of cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available:

• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete”

342


Deleting a cellular phone

STEP 1 Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

STEP 2 Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press phone.

b. Press

and say the name of the desired cellular desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press

Pattern B

and say “List phones”. While the name of the

.

3

STEP 2 Select a desired cellular phone to be deleted by using .

Changing the passkey

STEP 1 Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or

Pattern A

STEP 2 Press

.

, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

343


Pattern B

STEP 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit number by using .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press once again.

■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

344


Security and system setup

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

■

Security setting items and operation procedure

●

Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Security”

→

3. “Set PIN”

● Locking the phone book

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Security”

→

3. “Phonebook Lock”

●


1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock”

■

System setup items and operation procedure

● Setting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Guidance Vol”

●

Initialization

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Initialize”

can only be used for system setup operation.

3

Setting or changing the PIN

■

Setting a PIN

STEP 1 Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or

STEP 2 Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .

.

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

■

Changing the PIN

STEP 1 Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

345


STEP 2 Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or

STEP 3 Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .

.

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

STEP 1 Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock

(Phbk Unlock)” by using a voice command or .

STEP 2 Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or a. Press and say the registered PIN.

: b. Input a new PIN by using .

Setting voice guidance volume

STEP 1 Select “Guidance Vol” by using

STEP 2 Change the voice guidance volume.

.

To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

346


Initialization

STEP 1 Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using

STEP 2 Select “Confirm” by using again.

.

■ Initialization

●

The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming history

• Speed dial

• Registered cellular phone data

• Security code

●

Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state.

■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

●

Dialing by inputting a name

● Speed dialing

● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory

●

Using the phone book

3

347


Using the phone book

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

●

Adding a new phone number

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”

●

Setting speed dial

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

● Changing a registered name

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Change Name”

●

Deleting registered data

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”

●

Deleting speed dial

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”

● Listing the registered data

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “List Names”

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

●

Inputting a phone number by using a voice command

●

Transferring data from the cellular phone

●

Inputting a phone number by using

●

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history

■

Adding procedure

STEP 1 Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .

348


STEP 2 Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:

Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Press , say the desired number, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command.

Transferring data from the cellular phone

STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

3 b. Select the desired data by using .

349


Inputting a phone number by using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press

once again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

b. Select the desired data by using .

350


STEP 3 Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press and say the desired name.

b. Select “Record Name” by using desired name.

, and say the

STEP 4 Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or again.

In STEP 3 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial.

3

Setting speed dial

STEP 1 Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command or .

STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press , say desired number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired data by using .

351


STEP 3 Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

Changing a registered name

STEP 1 Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

STEP 2 Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods.

a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press , and say “List names”. During the desired name is read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired name by using .

STEP 3 Select “Record Name” with or .

STEP 4 Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

352


Deleting registered data

STEP 1 Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

STEP 2 Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press , and say the name of the desired phone number to be deleted.

b. Press desired phone number is being read aloud, press

Pattern B

, say “List phones”. While the name of the

.

3

STEP 2 Select data to be deleted by using .

Deleting speed dial

STEP 1 Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” by using a voice command or .

STEP 2 Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

.

353


Listing the registered data

Selecting “List names” by using a voice command begins reading the list of the registered data.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing while a data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following function will be available.

• Dialing: “Dial”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”

• Setting speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

■

Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

354

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Your Toyota is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system), whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors or glass hatch (if equipped) are opened/closed, and the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode or the engine switch position.

3

Outer foot lights (if equipped)

Personal/interior lights ( →

P. 356)

Engine switch light (vehicles without smart key system)

Front door courtesy light

Personal/interior lights or interior light ( →

P. 356, 357)

Interior light (

→ P. 357)

355

3-5. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior light main switch and personal/interior lights

Personal/interior light main switch

“OFF”

The personal/interior lights and interior light can be individually turned on or off.

Door position

The personal/interior lights and interior light come on when a door or the glass hatch (if equipped) is opened. They turn off when the doors and glass hatch are closed.

On

The personal/interior lights and interior light cannot be individually turned off.

Personal/interior lights

Front

On/off

The illuminated entry system is activated even if the light is turned off when the personal/interior light main switch is in door position.

356

Center (if equipped)

3-5. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior lights and interior light

On/off


Interior light

Center (if equipped)

Rear

Off

On


3

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

If the lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the personal/ interior light main switch is in door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.


Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.


P. 558)

357

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

358

Auxiliary boxes

Overhead console

Glove box

Bottle holders

Cup holders

Side table

Console box

Auxiliary box & cup holder

3-6. Using the storage features

Glove box and console box

Glove box

Unlock with the master key

(vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key


Lock with the master key

(vehicles without smart key system) or mechanical key


Open (pull lever)

3

■ Power back door main switch (vehicles with power back door)

The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (

→ P. 69)

CAUTION


Keep the glove box closed.


Console box

Upper

Pull up the knob to release the lock. Lift the lid.

359


Lower

Console box and overhead console

Push down the lever.

CAUTION




Overhead console

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

Press in the lid.

360


Overhead console

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.

If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or becomes cracked.


Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.

Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury.

■ Maximum storage weight

Do not place any object heavier than 0.4 lb. (200 g) in it. The console may be opened and cause injury.

3

361


Cup holders

Front (type A)

Cup holders

Removing the adapters changes the size. (

→ P. 364)

Front (type B)

Lift the lid.

Console box

Pull out the cup holder.

362

Side table

Rear (vehicles without third seat)


Cup holders

Install the side table before using the cup holder. (

→

P. 369)


→

P. 364)

3

Rear (vehicles with third seat)


→ P. 364)

363


Cup holders

■ Adjusting size of the cup holder (Front [type A], front [type B], side table, rear [vehicles with third seats])

Front (type A)

Remove the adapter.

Front (type B)

Remove the separator.

Side table

Remove the adapter.

Rear (vehicles with third seat)

Remove the adapter.

364


Cup holders

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■ When not in use

Front (type B) and console box cup holders: Keep the cup holders closed.


3

365


Bottle holders

Front

Rear

Bottle holders

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder

Do not place anything other than pet bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

366

Auxiliary boxes

Type A


Auxiliary boxes

Pull up the lever.

Type B

Lift the lid.

Remove the separator to use the box. (

→ P. 364)

3

Type C (if equipped)

Lift the lid.

367


Type D

Lift the lid.

Auxiliary boxes

■ Auxiliary box (type D)

Install the side table. (

→ P. 369)

CAUTION


Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.


368


Side table

Side table

■ Installing the side table

STEP 1 Take out the side table from the console box.

STEP 2 Remove the second center seat. (

→ P. 83)

STEP 3 Engage the front pins of the side table with the hooks.

Push down on the side table to engage the rear pin locks.

3

■

Removing the side table

STEP 1 Take out the second center seat from the console box.

369


STEP 2

Side table

Pull the lock release lever to remove the side table.

STEP 3

Stow the side table in the console box.

STEP 4

Push down on the end to engage the pins in the holes and close the console box door.

Make sure that the side table is securely locked in position.

CAUTION




370

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Side extender:

Place in side position then slide backwards.

3

371


Vanity mirror

Slide the cover.

The light turns on when the cover is opened. (vehicles with vanity mirror light)

372


Clock (vehicles without multi-information display)

Adjusts the hours.

Adjusts the minutes.

■ The clock is displayed when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ACC or ON.

3

373


Conversation mirror

Press in the lid.

Lower the overhead console.

Push the lid back up half way.

The top of the mirror catch in position.

374


Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for a following component.

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.

115 VAC: Audio device that use less than 100 W.

Type A (12 V)*

1

Type B (12 V)*

2

3

375

3-7. Other interior features

Type C (12 V)

Type D (115 VAC)*

3

Main switch

To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch.

Power outlet socket

Type E (12 V)

*

1

: Vehicles with seat heater

*

2

: Vehicles without seat heater

*

3

: Vehicles with rear entertainment system

376


■ The power outlet can be used when

12V

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is in ACC or

ON.

115 VAC


NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

12V

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

115 VAC

Do not use a 115 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.

If a 115 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is off.

■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115 VAC)

The following 115 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W.

● Appliances with high initial peak wattage

● Measuring devices that process precise data

● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

3

377


Seat heaters (if equipped)

Driver's seat

Front passenger's seat

Pops the knob out

ON

The indicator light comes on.

Adjusts the seat temperature

The further you turn the knob clockwise, the warmer the seat becomes.

■ The seat heaters can be used when


■ When not in use

Turn the knob fully counterclockwise. The indicator light turns off.

Press the knob into the recessed position.

378


CAUTION

■ Burns

● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

3

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

379


Armrests

Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

380


Floor mat

Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the driver's floor mat using the hooks provided.

CAUTION

■ When inserting the floor mat


Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.

● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward.

● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.

3

381


Luggage compartment features

■

Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

■ Shopping bag hooks

■ Auxiliary box

Lift the center deck board.

382


■

Separating luggage compartment

The center deck board can be used to separate the luggage compartment.

Remove the center deck board and insert it upright into the groove.

The board cannot be inserted when the luggage cover is stowed.

3

383


■

Luggage cover (vehicles with luggage cover)

STEP 1 Hang the hooks on the hook brackets on the second seat seatback.

Vehicles with the third seat:

When using the luggage cover, the third seat must be fold down. (

→

P. 82)

STEP 2 Pull out the luggage cover and engage both ends to secure it.

■ When taking out luggage through the glass hatch (vehicles with glass hatch)

STEP 1 Pull the luggage cover to disengage both ends.

STEP 2 Engage both ends of the luggage cover with the grooves shown in the illustration and stand the cover upright.

384


■ Removing the luggage cover (vehicles with luggage cover)

The luggage cover can be removed by following the procedure below.

Detach the hooks.

Push in the left side of the luggage cover while keeping hold of the right side. Then raise the right side and pull the luggage cover out.

■ Luggage storage box (vehicles without third seat)

STEP 1 Lift the deck board.

3

STEP 2 Secure the board using the hook.

385


■ Stowing the luggage cover (vehicles with luggage cover)

STEP 1

Remove the side deck boards and open the center deck board.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Fold the flaps on top of the luggage cover with the hooks rolled inside.

Place the left end of the luggage cover in the recess on the left-hand side and then lower the right end into the recess on the right-hand side.

CAUTION

■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.


Do not drive with any of the deck boards opened. Items may fall out and cause injury.

386


NOTICE

■ Shopping bag hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 4 lb. (2 kg) on shopping bag hooks.


Do not drive with the luggage cover standing upright in the grooves as the luggage cover may fall down.

■ Before inserting the center deck board into the luggage compartment

Make sure the luggage cover is not stowed.

■ Closing the back door (vehicles without third seat)

Do not close the back door with the hook attached, or the hook may be damaged.

3

387


Garage door opener (if equipped)

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink



Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink



.

Programming the HomeLink



(for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink



compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator

Buttons

■

Programming the HomeLink



STEP 1 Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink



control buttons.

Keep the indicator light on the

HomeLink



in view while programming.

388


STEP 2 Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink



and the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator light on the

HomeLink



changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

STEP 3 Test the operation of the Home-

Link



by pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed Home-

Link



button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink



) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading

“Programming a rolling code system”.

STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

3

389


■

Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink



” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

STEP 1 Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the training button.

Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink



button twice. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.

This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink



transceiver and operate the garage door.

STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink



.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink



in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink



button.

STEP 4

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.

When the indicator light on the HomeLink



compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

390


STEP 5 Test the operation of the HomeLink



by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

■

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

■

Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink



buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions.

3

Operating the HomeLink



Press the appropriate HomeLink



button. The HomeLink



indicator light on the HomeLink



transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink



continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Erasing the entire HomeLink



memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink



memory.

391


■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the Home-

Link  .

■ Certification for the garage door opener

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the

IC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

CAUTION

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink  Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

392


Compass (if equipped)

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■

Operation

To turn the compass on or off, press the switch.

■

Displays and directions

Display

N

NE

E

SE

S

SW

W

NW

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

3

393


Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

STEP 2 Press the switch until a number

(1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

394

STEP 3 Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.


■ Circling calibration

When C appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.

3

CAUTION

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

395


NOTICE

■ To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

396


4

4-1. Maintenance and care ............................... 398

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior......... 398

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.......... 401

4-2. Maintenance ................... 404

Maintenance requirements.................. 404

General maintenance....... 406

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................ 409

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ................. 410

Do-it-yourself service precautions .................... 410

Hood ................................ 414

Positioning a floor jack ..... 416

Engine compartment........ 419

Tires ................................. 434

Tire inflation pressure ...... 444

Wheels ............................. 448

Air conditioning filter......... 450

Key battery....................... 453

Checking and replacing fuses .............................. 456

Light bulbs........................ 467

397

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

●

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

●

For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

●

Wipe away any water.

●

Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Before washing the vehicle, do the following.

• Fold the mirrors back.

• Remove the antenna. (mast type only)

• Turn the power back door system off.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure car washes

● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

398

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ To prevent deterioration and body corrosion

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

4

CAUTION

■ Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

399


NOTICE

■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.

■ If the windshield washer nozzle become blocked

Contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object.

This may damage the nozzle.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

400

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

■

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

■

Cleaning the leather areas

●

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●

Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

●

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

●

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.

■

Synthetic leather areas

● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

●

Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.

●

Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

4

401


■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window or left-side rear quarter window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window or left-side rear quarter window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or print type antenna (if equipped). Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the windows clean. Wipe the windows in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or print type antenna (if equipped).

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

→ P. 123)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

402


NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.

● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window or left-side rear quarter window

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or print type antenna (if equipped).

4

403

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.

■

General maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

■

Scheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■

Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

404

4-2. Maintenance

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■ Warning in handling of battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

→ P. 430)

4

405


General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your

Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Items

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser/hoses

Washer fluid

Check points

Maintenance-free.

(

→

P. 430)

At the correct level? ( → P. 428)

At the correct level?

(

→ P. 426)


(

→

P. 421)

No fumes or strange sounds?

Not blocked with foreign matter?

( → P. 428)


( → P. 433)

406

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Check points

• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

• Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in

P?

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?

• Not pull to one side when applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

• Move smoothly and lock securely?

• Function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?

• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

4

407

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Door

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Items

Tire

Check points

• Operate smoothly?

• The lock system works properly?

• Is there any leakage after parking?

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?

• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

408


Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/

M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

■

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:

●

When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

●

When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

■

When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

■

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

4

409

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.

Items

Battery condition

Brake fluid level

Engine oil level

( →

P. 430)

(

→

P. 428)

Engine coolant level ( →

P. 426)

(→

P. 421)

Parts and tools

• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel

(used only for adding oil)

410

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuses

Items

( →

P. 456)

Radiator and condenser

( → P. 428)

Tire inflation pressure ( →

P. 444)

Washer fluid ( → P. 433)

Parts and tools

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

⎯

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

4

411


CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

● Do not touch the engine compartment when the electric cooling fan is operating.

The electric cooling fan may keep rotating for about 3 minutes even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is OFF.

With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch in ON, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch or the engine switch is OFF when working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille.

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

412


NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

4

413


Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

STEP 1 Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2 Lift the hood catch and lift the hood.

STEP 3 Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into either of the slots.

414


CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■ After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.

NOTICE

■ When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.

4

415


Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

■

Front

■

Rear (2WD models)

■ Rear (4WD models)

416


Removing the front jack point cover

Before jacking, remove the jack point cover.

STEP 1 Turn the bolts counterclockwise and remove them.


4

417


CAUTION

■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.

● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.

● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack.

Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.

● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever in P.

● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.

NOTICE

■ Front jack point cover

● After installing the front jack point cover, make sure it is securely in its original position.

● Before jacking up your vehicles, remove the front jack point cover. Otherwise, the cover may be damaged.

418


Engine compartment

Washer fluid tank ( → P. 433)

Engine oil filler cap

( →

P. 422)

Engine oil level dipstick

( →

P. 421)

Engine coolant reservoir

( →

P. 426)

Battery ( →

P. 430)

Brake fluid reservoir

( → P. 428)

Fuse boxes ( →

P. 456)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser

Radiator

( → P. 428)

( → P. 428)

4

419


Engine compartment cover

■ Removing the engine compartment cover

■

Installing the clips

420


Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

STEP 2 Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

STEP 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full

4

421


■

Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Oil grade

Items

ILSAC multi-grade engine oil

Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the oil filler cap.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level from low to full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)

422


■

Recommended viscosity


Outside temperature

With towing package

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

*: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

■ How to read oil container labels

Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil.

4

423


■ Engine oil consumption

● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

● A new engine consumes more oil.

● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per

1000 km)

● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles

(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:

STEP 1 Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF with the trip meter A reading shown. (

→ P. 177)

STEP 2 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch or the engine switch ON.

Without multi-information display

STEP 3 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays

000000.

With multi-information display

STEP 3 Continue to press and hold the button until “COMPLETE” appears on the multi-information display.

424


CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

4

425


Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line.

■

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

426


■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31 ° F [-35 ° C])

Canada: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44 ° F [-42 ° C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

4

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

427


Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause burns.

■ When the electric cooling fan is operating

Do not touch the engine compartment.

The electric cooling fan may keep rotating for about 3 minutes even after the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is OFF.

With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch in ON, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is OFF when working near the electric cooling fan.

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

428


■ Adding fluid

Fluid type

Items

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

4

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

429


Battery

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

■ Checking battery condition

Check the battery condition using the indicator color.

Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Blue: Good condition

White: Charging is necessary.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

430


■ After recharging the battery (vehicles with smart entry & start system)

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1. Shift the shift lever to P.

2. Open and close any of the doors.

3. Restart the engine.

CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safety charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

4

431


CAUTION

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

432


Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations.

● Any washer does not work.

● The low washer fluid warning light comes on (vehicles without multi-information display).

● The warning message appears on the multi-information display (vehicles with multi-information display).

CAUTION

■ When refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

4

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

433


Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■

Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

■ Tire rotation

Vehicles without compact spare tire

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the

“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.

Front

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

434


Vehicles with compact spare tire

Front

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

■

The tire pressure warning system

Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (

→

P. 494,

501)

Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.

4

435


Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (

→ P. 438)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■

The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when the tire inflation pressure is changed (such as when changing traveling speed or towing a trailer.)

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

■

How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

→

P. 538)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IG-ON mode

(vehicles with smart key system) or the engine switch to the

“ON” position (vehicles without smart key system).

436

STEP 4


Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times.


STEP 5 Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position, and then turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.


STEP 5 Wait for a few minutes with the ON mode, and then turn the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF mode.

4

437


Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your

Toyota dealer.

■ When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■ When the tire pressure warning valves and transmitter are removed from the wheel on occasions such as when replacing tires

The tire inflation pressure data updated before servicing is retained.

438


■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.

(

→

P. 444, 546).

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

→

P. 224)

4

439


■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

440


■ Tire pressure warning system certification


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:







FCC WARNING:




4

441


CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.

● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

● Do not tow the vehicle with the spare tire installed.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

442


NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

■ Do not use puncture sealant sprays to repair flats

Puncture sealant sprays may damage tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.

■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

4

443


Tire inflation pressure

■

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

→

P. 546)

444


■

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.

STEP 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

STEP 6 Reinstall the tire valve cap.

4

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

445


■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel efficiency

● Reduced driving comfort and tire life

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

446


CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

4

447


Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

■

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

Toyota does not recommend using:

●

Wheels of different sizes or types

●

Used wheels

●

Bent wheels that have been straightened

■

Aluminum wheel precautions

●

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

●

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

●

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

●

Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.

Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (

→

P. 436)

448


CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious injury or death.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

4

449


Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■

Removal method

STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.

STEP 2 Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Push each side of the glove box to release the pins. Then disconnect the claws at the bottom and remove the glove box.

Lift up the cover.

450


Remove the filter cover.

STEP 5

■ Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “ ↑ UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

4

■

Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

451


NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

452


Key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■

You will need the following items:

●

Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with rag.)

●

Small Phillips-head screwdriver

●

Lithium battery CR2032 (vehicles without smart key system),

CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system)

■

Replacing the battery (vehicles without smart key system)

STEP 1 Remove the cover using a coin protected with tape etc.

STEP 2 Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

4

453


■

Replacing the battery (vehicles with smart key system)

STEP 1 Take out the mechanical key.


STEP 3 Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

454


■ If the key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.

■ Use a CR2032 (vehicles without smart key system) or CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system) lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your

Toyota dealer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

4

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

455


Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.

STEP 2 The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below.

STEP 3 Remove the lid.

Engine compartment

Type A: Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Type B: Push the tab in and lift the lid off. (if equipped)

456

Under the instrument panel


STEP 4 After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” ( →

P. 459) for details about which fuse to check.

STEP 5 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

4

STEP 6 Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

457


Type B

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

458


Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■ Engine compartment

Type A (fuse block on the back of the cover)

Type A (fuse block)

4

Fuse

1 SPARE

2 SPARE

3 SPARE

Ampere

7.5 A

15 A

25 A

Spare fuse

Spare fuse

Spare fuse

Circuit

459


Fuse

4 DEF RLY

5 MIR HTR

6 P/OUT

7 DOOR 1

8 EFI NO.2

9 EFI NO.3

10 INJ NO.1

11 INJ NO.2

12 HTR

13 VSC NO.1

14 FAN MAIN

15 VSC NO.2

16 PTC NO.1

17 PTC NO.2

18 PTC NO.3

19 RR CLR

20 RR DEF

21 PBD

22 ALT

460

23 EPS

24 ST

50 A

30 A

50 A

30 A

30 A

40 A

30 A

30 A

15 A

10 A

50 A

50 A

Ampere

10 A

20 A

20 A

25 A

10 A

10 A

140 A

80 A

30 A

Circuit


MIR HTR (15 A)

Power outlet

Multiplex communication system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Starting system

Starting system


Enhanced vehicle stability control system

Electric cooling fan


PTC heater

PTC heater

PTC heater



Power back door

MIR HTR, P/OUT, DOOR 1, HTR,

RR DEF, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.1,

PTC NO.1, RR CLR, PTC NO.2,

PTC NO.3, ABS NO.2, PBD

Electric power steering

Starting system


Fuse

25 CRT

26 RADIO1

27 ECU-B

28 DOME

29 AMP

30 TOWING

31 IG2

32 STR LOCK

33 EFI MAIN

34 HAZ

35 G/H

36 ALT-S

37 AM2

38 H-LP LH

39 H-LP RH

40 H-LP LL

41 H-LP RL

42 HORN

43 EFI NO.1

10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

10 A

15 A

30 A

25 A

20 A

25 A

15 A

Ampere

10 A

15 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

Circuit

Rear seat entertainment system

Audio system

Steering sensor, gauges and meters, clock, air conditioning system, main body ECU, wireless remote control, smart key system, power back door, on-board diagnosis system

Vanity lights, personal lights, interior light, gauges and meters, engine switch light, door courtesy lights, power back door

Audio system

Trailer lights

INJ NO.1, INJ NO.2

Steering lock system

EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3

Turn signal lights

Power door lock system, multiplex communication system

Charging system

Multiplex communication system

Left-hand headlight (high beam)

Right-hand headlight (high beam)

Left-hand headlight (low beam)

Right-hand headlight (low beam)

Horn

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, smart key system

461

4


Fuse

44 ETCS

45 A/F

46 S-HORN

Type B (if equipped)

Ampere

10 A

20 A

7.5 A

Circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system

Air fuel ratio sensor

Horn

Fuse

1 INV-W/P

2 IGCT NO.2

3 A/C-D

Ampere

15 A

7.5 A

10 A

No circuit

No circuit

No circuit

Circuit

462

■

Under the instrument panel

Front side of the fuse block


Fuse block

Fuse

1 P/SEAT

2 POWER

3 RR DOOR RH

4 RR DOOR LH

5 FR FOG

6 OBD

7 FR DEF

8 STOP

9 DOOR NO.2

10 AM1

Ampere

30 A

30 A

25 A

25 A

15 A

7.5 A

25 A

10 A

25 A

7.5 A

Circuit

Power seat

Power windows

Power windows

Power windows

Front fog lights

On-board diagnosis system

Windshield wiper deicer

Stop lights, enhanced vehicle stability control system

Power windows

Starting system

463

4


13

14

15

Fuse

11 RR FOG

12 FUEL OPN

S/ROOF

TAIL

PANEL

16 ECU IG NO.1

17 ECU IG NO.2

18 A/C NO.2

19 WASH

20 S-HTR

Ampere

7.5 A

7.5 A

30 A

15 A

7.5 A

10 A

7.5 A

10 A

20 A

20 A

Circuit

No circuit

No circuit

Electric moon roof

Parking lights, tail lights, license plate lights, front fog lights, trailer lights

Glove box light, emergency flashers, audio system, outside rear view mirror defoggers, clock, power door lock system, seat heaters, rear seat entertainment system, enhanced vehicle stability control system, instrument panel light control dial, electronic controlled transmission switch, automatic transmission, downhill assist control system, steering switches

Multiplex communication system, electric moon roof, electronically controlled automatic transmission system, power back door, seat heaters, tire pressure warning system, electronic power steering, automatic transmission



Windshield wipers and washer

Seat heaters

464


21 GAUGE NO.1

22

23

24

Fuse

FR WIP

RR WIP

IGN

25 GAUGE NO.2

26 ECU-ACC

27

28

ACC SOCK

NO.1

ACC SOCK

NO.2

29

30

RADIO NO.2

MIR HTR

Ampere

10 A

30 A

15 A

10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

10 A

Circuit

Audio system, outside rear view mirror defoggers, back-up lights, charging system, emergency flashers, traction control system, instrument panel light control dial, windshield wiper deicer

Windshield wipers and washer

Rear window wiper and washer

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, steering lock system, antilock brake system, smart key system, SRS airbag system

Gauges and meters, back monitor

Power rear view mirror, shift lock system, smart key system

Power outlet

20 A

7.5 A

15 A

Power outlet

Audio system, clock, rear seat entertainment system, charging system, interior lights, personal lights

Outside rear view mirror defoggers

4

465


■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ( →

P. 467)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire


Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

466


Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■

Prepare a replacement light bulb.

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (

→

P. 542)

■

Remove the engine compartment cover.

→

P. 420

■

Turn the power back door main switch OFF. (vehicles with power back door)

→

P. 69

■ Front bulb locations

Parking and front side marker lights

Headlights

4


Front fog lights (if equipped)

467


■

Rear bulb locations


Back-up lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights


Replacing light bulbs

■

Headlights

STEP 1 Unplug the connector.

Remove the rubber cover.

468

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4


Release the bulb retaining spring.

Remove the bulb.

4

469


■

Front fog lights (if equipped)

STEP 1 Remove the fender liner bolts and clips as follows.

Left side

470

Right side


STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the fender liner.

4

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

471


STEP 4 Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

■

Parking and front side marker lights

STEP 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2 Remove the light bulb.

472


■

Front turn signal lights



4

473


■

Back-up lights, stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Left side

STEP 1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver and cover as shown in the illustrations.

Right side

STEP 1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver and cover as shown in the illustrations.

STEP 2 Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.

Back-up light

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail and rear side marker light

474

STEP 3

■

License plate lights

STEP 1


Remove the light bulb.

Back-up light

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail and rear side marker light

Remove the screw and remove the unit.


4


475


■

High mounted stoplight and outer foot lights

If the high mounted stoplight or outer foot lights has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ LED high mounted stoplight

The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Installing the fender liner clips

Insert the clips.

Insert the clip.

476


CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

4

477


478


5

5-1. Essential information ................... 480

If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................ 480

If you think something is wrong ......................... 487

Fuel pump shut off system ........................... 488

Event data recorder ......... 489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency .................... 491

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ....................... 491

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display) .......................... 501

If you have a flat tire......... 502

If the engine will not start ................................ 514

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............ 516

If you lose your keys/ wireless remote control transmitter ...................... 517

If the electronic key does not operate properly

(vehicles with smart key system).................... 518

If the battery is discharged ..................... 520

If your vehicle overheats ....................... 524

If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................. 527

479

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

If towing from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good condition. (

→

P. 484)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

●

The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

●

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

480

5-1. Essential information

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Towing eyelet

■ Emergency towing procedure

STEP 1 Release the parking brake.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to

ACC (engine off) or ON (engine running).

5

CAUTION

■ Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.

● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

481


NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Installing towing eyelet

STEP 1

Remove the eyelet cover while pushing it.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

482


■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet

→

P. 502

CAUTION

■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

5

483


Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■ To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From the front (2WD models)


484


From the front (4WD models)

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (4WD models)

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

From rear

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

5

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.

485


Using a flat bed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45

°

.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

486


If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■

Visible symptoms

●

Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

●

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

●

Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

■

Audible symptoms

●

Changes in exhaust sound

●

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

●

Strange noises related to the suspension system

●

Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■

Operational symptoms

●

Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

●

Appreciable loss of power

●

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

●

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

●

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

5

487


Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.


STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

STEP 2 Restart the engine.


STEP 1

STEP 2

Turn the engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

488


Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.

In a crash or a near car crash event

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:

●

Engine speed

●

Whether the brake pedal was depressed or not

●

Vehicle speed

●

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

●

Position of the transmission shift lever

●

Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not

●

Driver's seat position

●

SRS airbag deployment data

●

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

●

Front passenger’s occupant classification

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

5

489


Disclosure of the data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

● Officially requested by the police or other authorities

● Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

● Ordered by a court law

However, if necessary Toyota will:

● Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance

● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes

490

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

5

491

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Low engine oil pressure warning light (vehicles without multi-information display)

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.


(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system.

SRS warning light


• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

492


Warning light

(U.S.A.)


ABS warning light


• ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

(Canada)

Electric power steering warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

5

493


Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.


Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)

*1

Indicates that a door is not fully closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates that remaining fuel is about 2.2 gal. (8.3

L, 1.8 lmp. gal.) or less

Driver’s seat belt reminder light


*2

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

*3

*4

(On the center panel)

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light


*2

Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seat belt.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (vehicles without multi-information display)

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.


Check that all doors are closed.

Refuel the vehicle.

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift lever to “P”.

If the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.

494


Warning light

(U.S.A.)


Low washer fluid warning light (vehicles without multi-information display)

Low level of washer fluid

Engine oil replacement reminder light (vehicles without multi-information display)

Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds: Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.

Comes on and remains:

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

Master warning light

(vehicles with multi-information display)

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.


Fill the tank.

Check and change the engine oil if necessary.

Check and change the engine oil.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

→ P. 501

5

495


*1

: Open door warning buzzer:

The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

*2

: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminders sound to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. These buzzers sound for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*3

: Vehicles without navigation system

*4

: Vehicles with navigation system

■ Key reminder buzzer (vehicles without smart key system)

The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed with the engine off and the driver’s door opened.

■ Open moon roof reminder buzzer (vehicles with multi-information display)

The buzzer indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed with the engine off and the driver’s door opened.

■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ Engine oil replacement reminder light (U.S.A. ⎯ vehicles without multiinformation display)

The engine oil replacement reminder light will come on and flash at approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after an oil change. When the distance driven after an oil change exceeds approximately 5000 miles (8000 km), the light will come on and remain on.

■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil change system. ( →

P. 424)

496


■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

Without compact spare tire

The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.

With compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire.

Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.

5

497


■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm

2

or bar) or higher.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used.

Vehicles without compact spare tire

● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.

● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the trunk.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

498


CAUTION

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

5

499


CAUTION

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

500


If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions or incorrectly performed operations. When a message is shown, perform corrections as indicated in the message.

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.


Warning message


■ Warning buzzer

A buzzer may sound when a warning message is shown on the multi-information display.

■ If the warning message is shown again after its correction procedure has been performed

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

5

501


If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■

Before jacking up the vehicle

●

Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

●


●


●

Stop the engine.

●

Turn on the emergency flashers.

■

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Adapter socket

Jack handle Towing eyelet

Wrench Jack handle Jack

Spare tire

502

Taking out the jack

STEP 1


Remove the right side deck board.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Unhook the tightening strap and remove the pad.

After storing the jack, make sure it is securely held by the tightening strap.

Loosen

Tighten

5

503


Taking out the spare tire

STEP 1 Open the center deck board and remove the cover.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the cover.

If it is difficult to remove the cover, you can use the key.

Attach the adapter socket (for removing a spare tire) on the spare tire clamp bolt.

504

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7


Assemble the jack handle and tighten the screw.

Connect the jack handle and the adapter socket. Turn the jack handle.

The tire will be lowered completely to the ground.

Pull out the spare tire and stand it against the bumper.

5

Remove the holding bracket.

505


Replacing a flat tire

STEP 1

STEP 2

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear righthand side tire

Behind the rear lefthand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

506

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5


Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

5

507


Installing the tire

STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

STEP 2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Tapered portion

Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

Disc wheel sheet

STEP 3 Lower the vehicle.

508

STEP 4


Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

STEP 1 Remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side.

Put the flat tire on the ground with the outer side facing up and install the holding bracket.

Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

STEP 2 Turn the spare tire clamp bolt clockwise with a jack handle and adapter socket until you hear a click.

STEP 3 Stow the jack and all tools.

5

509


■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (

→ P. 538)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with compact spare tire)

Install the spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

→ P. 436)

510


CAUTION

■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured.

■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103

N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

5

511


CAUTION

■ When using the compact spare tire

● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

● ABS & Brake assist

● Enhanced VSC

● TRAC

● Cruise control system

● Navigation system (if equipped)

Also, not only can be following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:

(4WD models)

● 4WD system

512


NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

■ When stowing the flat tire

● Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.

● Tighten the spare tire clamp bolt to hold the spare wheel carrier by the hook securely.

5

513


If the engine will not start

If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting procedure (

→

P. 164, 168) or releasing the steering lock (

→

P. 166,

169), confirm the following points.

■

The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

●

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

●

The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (

→

P. 164, 168)

●

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(

→

P. 110)

■

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.


●

The battery may be discharged. (

→

P. 520)

●

The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■

The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart key system).

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.

(

→

P. 515)

514


■

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.


●

One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

●

The battery may be discharged. (

→

P. 520)

●

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehicles with smart key system).

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function (vehicles with smart key system)

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is functioning normally.

STEP 1 Set the parking brake.

STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.

STEP 3 Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACC mode.

STEP 4 Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

5

515


If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

STEP 1

STEP 2


Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to the ACC.

STEP 3 Depress the brake pedal.

STEP 4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

STEP 5 Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

516


If you lose your keys/wireless remote control transmitter

■

Keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.

■ Wireless remote control transmitter (vehicles without smart key system)

New genuine wireless remote control transmitters can be purchased and programmed by your Toyota dealer. If a wireless remote control transmitter has been lost, bring the other wireless remote control transmitter when going to pick up the new transmitter.

5

517


If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (

→

P. 37) or the electronic key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, and mechanical key linked functions

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine

STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.

STEP 2 Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch.

518


STEP 3 To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (

→

P. 164)

To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

■

Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (

→

P. 453)

5

519


If the battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.

You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below.

STEP 1

Connecting the jumper cables

If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

520


STEP 2

STEP 3 Vehicles with smart key system: Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

STEP 4

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch to

ON, then start the vehicle's engine.

STEP 5 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ Avoiding a discharged battery

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■ When the battery is removed or discharge

● The power back door must be initialized ( →

P. 71)

● The tire inflation pressure warning system must be initialized. ( →

P. 436)

5

521


CAUTION

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

522


NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

523

5


If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

STEP 2 Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood.

STEP 3

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Remove the engine compartment cover. (

→ P. 420)

STEP 4 Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.

STEP 5 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Engine coolant reservoir

Radiator

524


STEP 6

Add engine coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable.

(

→ P. 534 )

Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

● Steam is coming from under the hood.

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running.

● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

5

525


NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

526


If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

STEP 1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

STEP 4

STEP 5

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

Turn off TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (

→ P. 210)

■ Emergency hooks

If your vehicle becomes stuck and cannot move, the emergency hooks are used for another vehicle to pull your vehicle out in an emergency.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow another vehicle.

5

527


CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

528


6

6-1. Specifications................. 530

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ......... 530

Fuel information ............... 543

Tire information ................ 546

6-2. Customization ................ 558

Customizable features ..... 558

6-3. Initialization .................... 561

Items to initialize .............. 561

529

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Front tread

2WD models

Rear tread

4WD models

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupant + luggage)

Towing capacity

(Trailer weight + cargo)


With towing package

*

: GVM condition

188.4 in. (4785 mm)

75.2 in. (1910 mm)

Without roof rails

68.1 in. (1730 mm)

With roof rails

69.3 in. (1760 mm)

109.8 in. (2790 mm)

64.0 in. (1625 mm)

64.2 in. (1630 mm)*

64.2 in. (1630 mm)

64.8 in. (1645 mm)*

64.0 in. (1625 mm)

64.6 in. (1640 mm)*

1200 lb. (544 kg)

2000 lb. (900 kg)

5000 lb. (2000 kg)

530

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped under the right-hand front seat.

This number is also stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

■

Manufacture’s label

This number is also on the manufacturer’s label on the driver’s side center pillar.

6

531

6-1. Specifications

■

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

2GR-FE

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)

210.9 cu.in.

(3456 cm

3

)

Automatic adjustment

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 lmp.gal.)

532

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

Drain and refill (Reference)

Without filter

With filter

Oil grade

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.)

6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp.qt.)

ILSAC multi-grade engine oil

Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below.

Vehicles without towing package

Recommended oil viscosity

Outside temperature

Vehicles with towing package

6

Outside temperature

533

6-1. Specifications

Oil viscosity

●

The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

●

The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

Cooling system

Capacity (Reference)

Coolant type


9.3 qt. (8.8 L, 7.7 Imp.qt.)

10.0 qt. (9.5 L, 8.4 Imp.qt.)*


11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp.qt.)

12.4 qt. (11.7 L, 10.3 Imp.qt.)*

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

*: With towing package

534

6-1. Specifications

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage* at

68 ° F (20 ° C):

Charging rates

12.6

⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged

12.2

⎯ 12.4 V Half charged

11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged

(*: Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)

5 A max.

Rear differential (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Oil type


1.0 qt. (0.9 L, 0.8 Imp.qt.)

Hypoid gear oil API GL-5

Above 0 ° F (-18 ° C): SAE 90

Below 0 ° F (-18 ° C): SAE 80W or 80W-90

6

535

6-1. Specifications

Automatic transaxle

Fluid capacity (drain and refill) 3.7 qt. (3.5 L, 3.1 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

■ Automatic transmission fluid type

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Transfer (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Oil type


1.0 qt. (0.9 L, 0.8 Imp.qt.)

Hypoid gear oil API GL-5

Above 0 ° F (-18 ° C): SAE 90

Below 0 ° F (-18 ° C): SAE 80W or 80W-90

536

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance*

Pedal free play

1

Brake pad wear limit

3.3 in. (84.4 mm) Min.

0.08 ⎯ 0.12 in. (2 ⎯ 3 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

Parking brake pedal travel*

2

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

8 ⎯ 10 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

*

1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,

50 kgf) while the engine is running

*

2

: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf)

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

6

537

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P245/65R17 105S

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Rear:


2

or bar)

Spare:


2

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

2

or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

17

×

7 1/2 J

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

538

6-1. Specifications

Type B

Tire size



Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P245/55R19 103S


Front:


2

or bar)

Rear:


2

or bar)

Spare:


2

or bar)




2


When towing trailer

Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

19

×

7 1/2 J

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

6

539

6-1. Specifications

Type C

Tire size



Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P245/65R17 105S, T165/90D18 107M

(spare)


Front:


2

or bar)

Rear:


2

or bar)




2


Spare:


2

or bar)

17

×

7 1/2 J, 18

×

4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

540

6-1. Specifications

Type D

Tire size



Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P245/55R19 103S, T165/90D18 107M

(spare)


Front:


2

or bar)

Rear:


2

or bar)




2


When towing trailer

Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Spare:


2

or bar)

19

×

7 1/2 J, 18

×

4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

6

541

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Headlights

Light Bulbs


Parking/front side marker lights

Front fog lights*


Back-up lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Bulb No.

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

W

60/55

21

5

55

21

16

21/5

Interior


Outer foot lights*

Vanity lights

Personal/interior lights (front)

Personal/interior lights (center)*

Interior light

Door courtesy lights

A: H11 halogen bulbs

C: HB2 halogen bulbs

*

: If equipped

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

5

5

8

5

5

8

5

B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

Type

C

B

B

A

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

542


Fuel information

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane

Number 91) or higher required for optimum engine performance.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■

If your engine knocks

●

Consult your Toyota dealer.

●

You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■

Gasoline quality standards

●

Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

●

The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

●

The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.

6

543

6-1. Specifications

■ Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

■ Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline

● Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

● If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

544

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■ Notice on gasoline quality

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and emission control system to function improperly.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

6

545


Tire information

Typical tire symbols

546

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(

→

P. 549)

(

→

P. 548)

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Location of treadwear indicators (

→ P. 434)

6-1. Specifications

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

→

P. 439)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

→

P. 538)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Summer tire or all season tire (

→

P. 439)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked

“M+S” is a summer tire.

TEMPORARY USE ONLY (

→

P. 510)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

6

547

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Tire manufacturer's identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

548

6-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

6

549

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S.A. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

550

6-1. Specifications

■

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

6

551

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

552

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

Production options weight

Rim

Meaning

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 * that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty

12-volt battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with

Table 1 * below), and dividing by two

6

553

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

CT

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

554

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Meaning

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of

10,000 lb. or less.

6

555

6-1. Specifications

Ply

Test rim

556

Tire related term

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Meaning

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM

E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Meaning

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

* :Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

2

3

5

7

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

6

557

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your

Toyota dealer.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.

Door lock

(

→

P. 64,

518)

Item

Smart key system

(

→

P. 32)

Function

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors

Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors

Default setting

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Unlocking using a key

Smart key system

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Customized setting

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

ON

All doors unlocked in one step

OFF

ON OFF

558

6-2. Customization

Item

Wireless remote control

(

→

P. 53)

Automatic light control system

( →

P. 192)

Lights

(

→

P. 192)

Function


Unlocking operation

Default setting

Customized setting

OFF ON

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one step

Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Door lock buzzer

Operation signal

(Buzzer)

Panic function

Glass hatch opening operation

Light sensor sensitivity

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only)

ON

60 seconds

ON

ON

ON

ON

Push and hold

Level 3

30 seconds

ON

OFF

30 seconds

120 seconds

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Push twice

One short push

Level 1 to 5

0 second

60 seconds

90 seconds

OFF

6

559

6-2. Customization

Item

Alarm system

(

→

P. 116)


( →

P. 183)

Function

Time elapsed before the alarm is set

Language selection

Illumination

(

→

P. 355)

Time elapsed before lights turn off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation after the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch or the engine switch is turned

OFF

Outer foot lights

Default setting

14 seconds

English

15 seconds

ON

ON

ON

Customized setting

30 seconds

French

Spanish

Chinese

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

OFF

OFF

OFF

560

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.

Item

Power back door

Tire pressure warning system

When to initialize

• After reconnecting or changing the battery

• After changing a fuse

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or towing trailer, etc.

Reference

P. 68

P. 434

561

6

6-3. Initialization

562

For owners

7

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners .............. 564

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French) ..................... 565

563

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:

1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,

1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

.

564

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité

● Tendez la sangle diagonale de sorte qu'elle couvre complètement l'épaule, sans entrer en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.

● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.

● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

7

565

Entretien et soin

■

Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.

Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION

■

Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.

566

Index

Abbreviation list ..................... 568

Alphabetical index.................. 570

What to do if... ........................ 581

For details of equipment related to the navigation system and touch screen, such as the audio system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

567

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

GAWR

GVM

I/M

INT

LED

OBD

SRS

TIN

TEMP

TPMS

TRAC

VIN

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

2WD 2 Wheel Drive

4WD 4 Wheel Drive

A/C

ABS

ACC

ALR

Air Conditioning

Anti-Lock Brake System

Accessory

Automatic Locking Retractor

CAL

CRS

DAC

DISP

ECU

EDR

ELR

EPS

Calibration

Child Restraint System

Downhill Assist Control

Display

Electronic Control Unit

Event data recorder

Emergency Locking Retractor

Electric Power Steering

Gross Axle Weight Ratings

Gross Vehicle Mass

Emission inspection and maintenance

Intermittent

Light Emitting Diode

On Board Diagnostics

Supplemental Restraint System

Tire Identification Number

Temperature

Tire Pressure Warning System

Traction Control

Vehicle Identification Number

568

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

Enhanced VSC Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control

Abbreviation list

569

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A

A/C.....................248, 242, 259, 256

ABS ...........................................209

Air conditioning filter...............450

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter..............450

Front automatic air

conditioning system ............248

Front manual air conditioning

system ................................242

Rear automatic air

conditioning system ............259

Rear manual air conditioning

system ................................256

Airbags

Airbag operating

conditions............................125

Airbag precautions for your child ....................................129

Airbag warning light...............492

Curtain shield airbag operating

conditions............................125

Curtain shield airbag precautions .........................129

Front passenger occupant

classification system ...........134

General airbag precautions .........................129

Locations of airbags ..............122

Modification and disposal of airbags ................................133

Proper driving

posture........................ 120, 129

Side airbag operating

conditions ........................... 125

Side airbag precautions ........ 129

SRS airbags.......................... 122

Alarm......................................... 116

Antenna .................................... 272

Anti-lock brake system ........... 209

Armrest ..................................... 380

Audio input............................... 292

Audio system

A/V input adapter .................. 316

Antenna................................. 272

Audio input ............................ 292

Audio visual input.................. 316

AUX adapter ......................... 292

CD player/changer ................ 275

DVD player............................ 303

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 282

Optimal use........................... 289

Portable music player ........... 292

Radio..................................... 269

Rear seat entertainment

system ................................ 296

Steering wheel audio

switch.................................. 294

Type ...................................... 266

Audio visual input.................... 316

Automatic light control

system .................................... 192

570

Alphabetical index

Automatic transmission ......... 171

AUX adapter............................. 292

Auxiliary box........................... 367

A/V input adapter .................... 316

B

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 467

Wattage ................................ 542

Back door

Back door ............................... 68

Wireless remote control.......... 53

Smart key system................... 32

Battery

Checking .............................. 430

If the vehicle has discharged

battery ................................ 520

Preparing and checking before

winter ................................. 224

Bluetooth

®

............................... 329

Bottle holder ............................ 366

Brakes

Fluid...................................... 428

Parking brake ....................... 176

Brake assist ............................. 209

Break-in tips ............................ 157

C

Care

Exterior..................................398

Interior ...................................401

Seat belts ..............................402

Cargo capacity .........................223

Cargo hooks .............................382

CD changer...............................275

CD player ..................................275

Chains .......................................224

Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition........140

Booster seats, installation .....144

Convertible seats,

definition .............................140

Convertible seats,

installation...........................144

Front passenger occupant

classification system ...........134

Infant seats, definition ...........140

Infant seats, installation.........144

Installing CRS with lower

anchorages .........................150

Installing CRS with seat

belts ....................................146

Installing CRS with top

straps ..................................151

Child safety

Airbag precautions ................129

Battery precautions .......431, 522

Child restraint system............140

Child-protectors.......................66

How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................93

Installing child restraints........144

Moon roof precautions ..........105

571

Alphabetical index

Power window lock switch.....101

Power window precautions ...102

Removed key battery precautions .........................455

Seat belt extender precautions ...........................95

Seat belt precautions ..............94

Seat heater precautions ........379

Child-protectors .........................66

Cleaning

Exterior..................................398

Interior ...................................401

Seat belts ..............................402

Clock .................................183, 373

Compass...................................393

Condenser ................................428

Console box .............................359

Conversation mirror ................374

Cooling system

Engine overheating ...............524

Cruise control...........................200

Cup holders ..............................362

Curtain shield airbags .............122

Customizable features.............558

D

Daytime running light

system ....................................194

Defogger

Rear window .........................262

Side mirrors...........................262

Dimension.................................530

Dinghy towing .......................... 238

Display

Trip information ..................... 183

Warning message ................. 501

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 410

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights .............. 355

Wattage................................. 542

Doors

Door glasses ......................... 101

Door lock..................... 32, 53, 64

Side mirrors............................. 99

Downhill assist control

system .................................... 207

Driver's seat belt reminder

light......................................... 494

Driving

Break-in tips .......................... 157

Correct posture ..................... 120

Procedures............................ 156

Winter driving tips ................. 224

DVD player................................ 303

E

Electric power steering ........... 209

Electronic key

If your electronic key battery is

discharged .......................... 518

Emergency, in case of

If the back door opener is

inoperative ............................70

572

Alphabetical index

If the electronic key does not

operate properly................. 518

If the engine will not start...... 514

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted ................................ 516

If the vehicle has discharged

battery ................................ 520

If the warning buzzer

sounds... ........................... 491

If the warning light turns

on ....................................... 491

If the warning message is

displayed............................ 501

If you have a flat tire ............ 502

If you lose your keys/ wireless remote control

transmitter .......................... 517

If you think something is

wrong ................................. 487

If your vehicle becomes

stuck................................... 527

If your vehicle needs to be

towed ................................. 480

If your vehicle overheats ...... 524

Engine

Compartment........................ 419

Engine switch ............... 164, 168

Hood..................................... 414

How to start the

engine ........................ 165, 168

Identification number ............ 531

If the engine will not start ......514

Ignition switch................164, 168

Overheating...........................524

Engine compartment cover.....420

Engine coolant

Capacity ................................534

Checking ...............................426


winter ..................................224

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ......................................177

Engine immobilizer system.....110

Engine oil

Capacity ................................533

Checking ...............................421


winter ..................................224

Engine oil maintenance

data .........................................424

Enhanced vehicle stability

control ....................................209

Enhanced VSC .........................209

EPS............................................209

Event data recorder .................489

F

Floor mat...................................381

Fluid

Brake.....................................428

Washer..................................433

573

Alphabetical index

Fog lights

Replacing light bulbs .............467

Switch....................................196

Wattage.................................542

Front automatic air

conditioning system..............248

Front fog lights


Switch....................................196

Wattage.................................542

Front manual air conditioning

system ....................................242

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............134

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light.........................494

Front seats

Adjustment ..............................75

Front side marker lights


Switch....................................192

Wattage.................................542

Front turn signal lights


Wattage.................................542

Fuel

Capacity ................................532

Fuel gauge ............................177

Fuel pump shut off system ....488

Gas station information ......... 584

Information ............................ 543

Refueling............................... 106

Type ...................................... 532

Fuel door .................................. 106

Fuel filler door.......................... 106

Fuel pump shut off system ..... 488

Fuses ........................................ 456

G

Garage door opener ................ 388

Gas station information .......... 584

Gauges...................................... 177

Glove box ................................. 359

H

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)................ 325

Head restraints

Adjusting ................................ 87

Headlights

Replacing light bulbs............. 467

Switch ................................... 192

Wattage................................. 542

Heaters

Seat heaters.......................... 378

Side mirror ............................ 262

Hood.......................................... 414

Hooks

Cargo hook ........................... 382

Shopping bag........................ 382

574

Alphabetical index

I

I/M test...................................... 409

Identification

Engine .................................. 531

Vehicle.................................. 531

Ignition switch ................. 164, 168

Illuminated entry system ........ 355

Indicator lights ........................ 179

Initialization

Items to initialize................... 561

Inside rear view mirror.............. 97

Interior lights

Interior lights......................... 355

Switch........................... 357, 356

Wattage ................................ 542

J

Jack

Positioning a floor jack ......... 416

Replacing the wheel ............. 502

Jack handle.............................. 502

K

Keyless entry............................. 53

Keys

Electronic key ......................... 30

Engine switch ............... 164, 168

If the electronic key does not

operate properly................. 518

If you lose your keys/ wireless remote control

transmitter .......................... 517

Ignition switch............... 164, 168

Keyless entry...........................53

Key number.............................30

Keys ........................................30

Mechanical key .......................30


key ........................................53

L

License plate lights


Wattage.................................542

Light bulbs

Replacing ..............................467

Wattage.................................542

Lights

Door courtesy lights ..............355

Fog light switch .....................196

Headlight switch ....................192

Interior light switch ........356, 357

Outer foot lights.....................355

Personal light switch .............356


Turn signal lever....................175

Vanity lights...........................372

Wattage.................................542

Load capacity ...........................223

Lock steering column......166, 169

Luggage cover .........................384

575

Alphabetical index

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself

maintenance .......................410

General maintenance............406

Maintenance data..................530

Maintenance requirements....404

Meter

Instrument panel light control .................................178

Meters ...................................177

Mirrors

Conversation mirror...............374

Inside rear view mirror.............97

Side mirror heaters................262

Side mirrors.............................99

Vanity mirrors ........................372

Moon roof .................................103

MP3 disc ...................................282

Multi-information

display ....................................183

O

Off-road precautions ...............214

Odometer ..................................177

Oil

Engine oil ..............................421

Opener

Back door ................................68

Fuel filler door .......................106

Glass hatch .............................73

Hood......................................414

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding............... 99

Outside temperature

display .................................... 184

Overhead console.................... 360

Overheating, Engine................ 524

P

Parking brake ........................... 176

Parking lights


Switch ................................... 192

Wattage................................. 542

Personal/interior lights

Switch ................................... 356

Wattage................................. 542

Power outlet ............................. 375

Power windows........................ 101

R

Radiator .................................... 428

Radio......................................... 269

Rear automatic air

conditioning system ............. 259

Rear manual air conditioning

system .................................... 256

Rear seat

Adjustment .............................. 78

Folding down second

seatback ............................... 80

Folding down third

seatback ............................... 82

576

Alphabetical index

Removing the second

center seat ........................... 83

Stowing the second

center seat ........................... 83

Rear seat entertainment

system ................................... 296

Rear turn signal lights


Wattage ................................ 542

Rear view mirror

Compass .............................. 393

Rear view monitor system...... 203

Rear window defogger............ 262

Rear window wiper.................. 199

Replacing

Fuses.................................... 456

Key battery ........................... 453

Light bulbs ............................ 467

Tires ..................................... 502

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners ........................... 564

S Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ............ 90

Automatic Locking

Retractor .............................. 91

Child restraint system

installation .......................... 144

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts...................... 402

Emergency Locking

Retractor ...............................91

How to wear your seat belt......90

How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................93

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use .................................92

Reminder light .......................494

Seat belt extenders .................93

Seat belt pretensioners ...........91

Seat heaters..............................378

Seating capacity.......................223

Seats

Adjustment ........................75, 78

Adjustment precaution ......77, 86

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............144

Cleaning ................................401

Head restraint..........................87

Properly sitting in the seat.....120

Seat heaters..........................378

Service reminder

indicators ..............................179

Shift lever

Automatic transmission .........171

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P.................516

Shift lock system .....................516

Shopping bag hooks ...............382

Side airbags..............................122

577

Alphabetical index

Side marker lights

Replacing ..............................467

Switch....................................192

Wattage.................................542

Side mirrors

Adjusting and folding...............99

Side table ..................................369

Smart key system

Entry function ..........................32

Starting the engine ................165

Spare tire

Inflation pressure...................538

Spare tire...............................502

Spark plug ................................535

Specifications...........................530

Speech command switch ........330

Speedometer ............................177

Steering

Column lock release......166, 169

Steering wheel

Adjustment ..............................96

Audio switches ......................294

Climate remote control

switches ..............................265

Stop lights


Wattage.................................542

Storage feature.........................358

Storage precautions ................221

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................527

Sun visors ................................ 371

Switch

Engine switch................ 164, 168

Fog light switch ..................... 196

Ignition switch ............... 164, 168

Light switches ....................... 192

Power door lock switch ........... 65

Power window switch............ 101

SNOW switch........................ 172

Window lock switch............... 101

Wiper and washer

switch.......................... 197, 199

T

Tachometer .............................. 177

Tail lights


Switch ................................... 192

Wattage................................. 542

Talk switch ............................... 330

Telephone switch..................... 330

Theft deterrent system

Alarm..................................... 116

Engine immobilizer system ... 110

Theft prevention labels ........... 119

Tire inflation pressure ............. 444

Tire information

Glossary................................ 552

Size ....................................... 549

Tire identification number...... 548

Uniform tire quality

grading................................ 550

578

Alphabetical index

Tires

Chains .................................. 224

Checking .............................. 434

If you have a flat tire ............. 502

Inflation pressure.................. 444

Information ........................... 546

Replacing ............................. 502

Rotating tires ........................ 434

Size ...................................... 538

Snow tires............................. 224

Tire pressure warning

system........................ 434, 494

Tools......................................... 502

Total load capacity.................. 223

Towing

Dinghy towing....................... 238

Emergency towing................ 481

Trailer towing........................ 228

Traction control....................... 209

TRAC ........................................ 209

Trip information....................... 183

Trip meter................................. 177

Turn signal lights


Switch................................... 175

Wattage ................................ 542

V

Valet key .....................................30

Vanity lights

Vanity lights...........................372

Wattage.................................542

Vanity mirrors...........................372

Vehicle identification

number ...................................531

W

Warning buzzers

Brake system ........................491

Open door .............................494

Seat belt reminder.................494

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system ..........492

Brake assist system ..............492

Brake system ........................491

Charging system ...................492

Electric power steering

system ................................492

Electronic engine control

system ................................492

Engine oil pressure ...............492

Malfunction indicator lamp ....492

Master warning light ..............494

Open door .............................494

Pretensioners ........................492

Seat belt reminder light .........494

SRS airbags ..........................492

Tire pressure warning light....494

Warning messages ..................501

579

Alphabetical index

Washer

Checking ...............................433

Preparing and checking

before winter .......................224

Switch............................197, 199

Washing and waxing ...............398

Weight

Cargo capacity ......................219

Load limits .............................223

Weight ...................................530

Wheels ......................................448

Window glasses ......................101

Window lock switch.................101

Windows

Power windows .....................101

Rear window defogger ..........262

Washer..........................197, 199

Windshield wiper de-icer.........264

Windshield wipers ...................197

Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery ............453

Wireless remote control key....53

WMA disc..................................282

580

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 502

If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

The shift lever cannot be moved out

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

P. 514

If the engine will not start

P. 110

Engine immobilizer system

P. 520

If the battery is discharged

P. 516

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 524

If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 517

If you lose your keys/ wireless remote control transmitter

The battery runs out

The doors cannot be locked

P. 520

If the battery is discharged

P. 64

P. 68

Side doors

Back door

P. 116

Alarm The horn begins to sound

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 527

If the vehicle becomes stuck

581

What to do if...

The warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 491

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

582

■ Warning lights

Brake system warning light or

P. 491

Charging system warning light

P. 492

Low engine oil pressure warning light

P. 492

Malfunction indicator lamp or

P. 492

SRS warning light

P. 492

Open door warning light

P. 494

or

Low fuel level warning light

P. 494

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

P. 494

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 494

Master warning light

P. 494

Engine oil replacement reminder light

P. 494

Low washer fluid warning light

P. 494

What to do if...

or

ABS warning light Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light

P. 494

Tire pressure warning light

P. 494

P. 492

Electric power steering warning light

P. 492

The warning message is displayed

P. 501

If a warning message is displayed

583

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 414

Fuel filler door

P. 106

Back door opener

P. 68

584

Hood lock release lever

P. 414

Fuel filler door opener

P. 106


P. 538

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 lmp.gal.)

Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

Drain and refill

(Reference)

P. 538

Without filter

With filter qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

6.0 (5.7, 5.0)

6.4 (6.1, 5.4)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Engine oil type

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

Without towing package: 5W-20

With towing package: 5W-30

P. 533